CMP 200 Service Manual - 740986

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 237

CPI CMP 200 SERIES

X-RAY GENERATOR

CMP 200

OFF ON

MENU

AEC mAs mA/ms AEC FIELD I II III SMALL LARGE

FOCAL
MODE
SPOT

TABLE NON- WALL


AUX 1 AUX 2 PREP EXPOSE
BUCKY BUCKY BUCKY

CMP200_001A.CDR

SERVICE MANUAL
PREPARED BY:

COMMUNICATIONS & POWER INDUSTRIES CANADA INC.


45 RIVER DRIVE
GEORGETOWN, ONTARIO, CANADA L7G 2J4
TELEPHONE: (905) 877-0161

SERVICE MANUAL P/N 740986-00


CPI Canada Inc.

PRE-INSTALLATION 1¾

CMP 200 INSTALLATION 2¾


SERVICE AND
INSTALLATION INTERFACING, PROGRAMMING, AND
CALIBRATION 3¾
MANUAL
P/N 740986-00 ACCEPTANCE TESTING 4¾

TROUBLESHOOTING 5¾

REGULAR MAINTENANCE 6¾

THEORY OF OPERATION 7¾

SPARES 8¾

SCHEMATICS 9¾

The original version of this manual (June 17, 2001)


has been drafted in the English language by:
Communications & Power Industries
communications & medical products division.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-00 Rev. A Page 0-1
CPI Canada Inc.

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 0-2 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-00 Rev. A
CPI Canada Inc. Pre-installation 1

CHAPTER 1

PRE-INSTALLATION
CONTENTS:

Section Title
1.1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 Generator Description ............................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Features .................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Radiographic Performance........................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.1.4 Environmental Specifications .................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.5 Applicable Standards ................................................................................................................................ 1-3
1.1.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ....................................................................................................... 1-7
1.1.7 RoHS Compliance..................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.0 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-8
1.2.1 Safety and Warning Symbols .................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2 Safety Notices and Warnings .................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.3 Safety Warning Labels ............................................................................................................................ 1-10
1.3.0 PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION............................................................................................................ 1-14
1.3.1 Generator Heat Output............................................................................................................................ 1-14
1.3.2 Generator Power Requirements ............................................................................................................. 1-14
1.3.3 Generator Ground Requirements............................................................................................................ 1-17
1.3.4 Locating and Mounting the Generator..................................................................................................... 1-18
1.3.5 Cable Entrance and Seismic Center Location ........................................................................................ 1-19
1.3.6 Tools and test Equipment Required........................................................................................................ 1-20
1.3.7 Pre-Installation Checklist......................................................................................................................... 1-20
1.4.0 GENERATOR LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS ............................................................................ 1-21
1.5.0 COMPATIBILITY LISTING.......................................................................................................................... 1-23
1.6.0 CUSTOMER SUPPORT ............................................................................................................................. 1-24
1.7.0 COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT.................................................................................................................. 1-24

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V Page 1-1
1 Pre-installation CPI Canada Inc.

1.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This chapter summarizes the main features of the CMP 200 X-ray generator (performance, regulatory
and compatibility). Safety information is provided, along with environmental, room, and installation
requirements. This chapter concludes with a pre-installation checklist and a diagram showing the major
component layout.
The information in this chapter is provided in order for the installer to be able to plan the site
layout prior to installation of the generator.

1.1.1 Generator Description

The CMP 200 X-ray generator is intended for use in stationary radiographic X-ray systems, including
tomography. The X-ray generator consists of a main power cabinet, and a control console. The main
power cabinet contains the HT tank and control circuits, the filament drivers, the low speed starter, and
interface connections to the room equipment.
The control console allows the operator to select the technique factors, image receptors, etc.,
and to initiate an X-ray exposure.

1.1.2 Features

The following are the main features of and the options available for the generator:
• Integral low speed starter, compatible with X-ray tubes with type “R” stator. Optional compatibility with
GE 23/23 Ω equal impedance “E” stator.
• 24 VDC, 110, or 220 VAC power source for Buckys.
• 24 VAC 150 watts power source for collimator lamp.
• 24 VDC 45 watts power source for system locks.
• Optional AEC.

1.1.3 Radiographic Performance

kVp range: 40 to 125 kV or 40 to 150 kV,


depending on model.
kVp steps: variable in 1 kV steps.
kVp accuracy: ± 5 %.
Risetime (10-90%): <1.5 ms.
Time range: 1.0 to 6300 milliseconds.
mAs range 0.1 to 500 mAs (30/32/40 kW), 0.1 to
630 mAs (50 kW).
mAs accuracy: ± (10 % + 0.2) mAs.
mA range 10 to 400 mA (30/32 kW), 10 to 500
mA (40 kW), 10 to 630 mA (50 kW).
Coefficient of linearity: 0.05 (station to station) mAs.
Coefficient of reproducibility: kV, mAs ≤ 0.05.

Page 1-2 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V
CPI Canada Inc. Pre-installation 1

1.1.4 Environmental Specifications

OPERATING
Ambient temperature range 10 to 40 °C (50 to 104 °F).
Relative humidity 20 to 80%, non-condensing.
Altitude Sea-level to 2440 meters (700 to 1100 hPa).

TRANSPORT AND STORAGE


Ambient temperature range -25 to 70 °C (-13 to 158 °F)..
Relative humidity 5 to 95%, non-condensing.
Atmospheric pressure range 500 to 1060 hPa (375 to 795 mm Hg).

1.1.5 Applicable Standards

The CMP 200 series of X-ray generators comply with the regulatory requirements and design standards in
this section as follows:
• VZW2555 series: Only the standards marked with an asterisk * under SAFETY.
• VZW2556 series: All standards in this section.

A) SAFETY
• * FDA Center for Devices & Radiological Health (CDRH) - 21 CFR title 21 subchapter J (USA).
• * Radiation Emitting Devices Act - C34 (Canada).
• Medical Device Regulations (Canada).
• EC Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices (European Community).

• * EN 60601-1/IEC 60601-1, EN 60601-2-7/IEC 60601-2-7, CSA 601.1, UL60601.1.


-Type of protection against electric shock: Class I equipment.
-Degree of protection against electric shock: Not classified.
-Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water: Ordinary equipment.
-Mode of operation: Continuous operation with intermittent loading (standby - exposure).
-Equipment not suitable for use in presence of a flammable anesthetic mixture with air or
with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
• EN 60601-1-4/IEC 60601-1-4, EN ISO 14971.

NOTE: All referenced standards are considered to be at the latest revision.

The CE Mark is a declaration by the manufacturer that the product complies with
the requirements of the applicable European Union (EU) medical device directive
and that the product has been subject to conformity assessment procedures as
provided in that directive.

A CSA mark with the indicators “C” and “US” means that product is certified for
both the U.S. and Canadian markets, to the applicable U.S. and Canadian
standards.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V Page 1-3
1 Pre-installation CPI Canada Inc.

B) EMC (EN 60601-1-2:2001/IEC 60601-1-2:2001)


Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic emissions
The VZW2556 series of X-ray generators is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified
below. The customer or the user of the VZW2556 series should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
RF emissions Group 1 The VZW2556 series of X-ray generators use RF energy only for
CISPR 11 their internal functions. Therefore, the RF emissions are very low
and are not likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic
equipment.
RF emissions Class A The VZW2556 series of X-ray generators must be used only in a
CISPR 11 (The VZW2556 shielded location with a minimum RF shielding effectiveness and,
series of X-ray for each cable that exits the shielded location, a minimum RF filter
generators in attenuation of 40dB from 30 MHz to 230 MHz and 47dB from 230
combination with MHz to 1 GHz. (The minimum at 30 MHz is 40dB and the
shielded location) minimum at 230 MHz is 47dB).
Harmonic Not Applicable
emissions The VZW2556 series is suitable for use in all establishments other
IEC 61000-3-2 than domestic and those directly connected to the public low-
Voltage Not Applicable voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for
fluctuations/ domestic purposes.
flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3
NOTE It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded location be
verified to assure that they meet the minimum specifications.

Page 1-4 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V
CPI Canada Inc. Pre-installation 1

1.1.5 Applicable Standards (Cont)

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity


The VZW2556 series of X-ray generators is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified
below. The customer or the user of the VZW2556 series should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity IEC 60601 Compliance Electromagnetic environment –
test test level level guidance
Electrostatic ± 6 kV contact ± 6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic tile.
discharge (ESD) ± 8 kV air ± 8 kV air If floors are covered with synthetic material, the
IEC 61000-4-2 relative humidity should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast ± 2 kV for power ± 2 kV for power Mains power quality should be that of a typical
transient/burst supply lines supply lines commercial or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-4 ± 1 kV for ± 1 kV for
input/output lines input/output lines
Surge ± 1 kV differential ± 1 kV differential Mains power quality should be that of a typical
IEC 61000-4-5 mode mode commercial or hospital environment.
± 2 kV common ± 2 kV common
mode mode
Voltage dips, < 5 % UT < 5 % UT Mains power quality should be that of a typical
short interruption, (> 95 % dip in UT) (> 95 % dip in UT) commercial or hospital environment. If the user
and voltage for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle of the VZW2556 series X-ray generator requires
variations on continued operation during power mains
power supply interruptions, it is recommended that the X-ray
40 % UT 40 % UT
input lines generator be powered from an uninterruptible
(60 % dip in UT) (60 % dip in UT)
IEC 61000-4-11 power supply or battery.
for 5 cycles for 5 cycles

70 % UT 70 % UT
(30 % dip in UT) (30 % dip in UT)

< 5 % UT < 5 % UT
(> 95 % dip in UT) (> 95 % dip in UT)
for 5 s for 5 s
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should be at
(50/60 Hz) levels characteristic of a typical location in a
IEC 61000-4-8 typical commercial or hospital environment
NOTE: UT is the A.C. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V Page 1-5
1 Pre-installation CPI Canada Inc.

1.1.5 Applicable Standards (Cont)

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity


The VZW2556 series of X-ray generators is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified
below. The customer or the user of the VZW2556 series should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity IEC 60601 Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
test test level level
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms The VZW2556 series of X-ray generators must be
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 150 kHz to used only in a shielded location with a minimum RF
80MHz 80MHz shielding effectiveness and, for each cable that
enters the shielded location, a minimum RF filter
attenuation of 40dB from 30 MHz to 230 MHz and
47dB from 230 MHz to 1 GHz. (The minimum at 30
MHz is 40dB and the minimum at 230 MHz is
47dB.)
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m Field strengths outside the shielded location from
IEC 61000-4-3 80MHz to 2.5 80MHz to 2.5 fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an
GHz GHz electromagnetic site survey, should be less than 3
V/m.a

Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment


marked with the following symbol:

NOTE 1 These guidelines may not apply all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.

NOTE 2 It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded location be
verified to assure that they meet the minimum specification.
a
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted
theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the
VZW2556 series of X-ray generators is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the X-ray
generator should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional
measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the X-ray generator.

Page 1-6 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V
CPI Canada Inc. Pre-installation 1

1.1.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

In accordance with the intended use, some models of this series of X-ray generators comply with the
European Council Directive concerning Medical Devices. The CE marking affixed to compliant products
signifies this. One of the harmonized standards of this Directive defines the permitted levels of
electromagnetic emission from this equipment and its required immunity from the electromagnetic
emissions of other devices.

It is not possible, however, to exclude with absolute certainty the possibility that other high frequency
electronic equipment, which is fully compliant to the EMC regulations, will not adversely affect the
operation of this generator. If the other equipment has a comparatively high level of transmission power
and is in close proximity to the generator, these EMC concerns (the risk of interference) may be more
pronounced. It is therefore recommended that the operation of equipment of this type such as mobile
telephones, cordless microphones and other similar mobile radio equipment be restricted from the vicinity
of this X-ray generator.

1.1.7 RoHS Compliance

CMP 200

产品中有毒有害物质或元素的名称及含量
Table of hazardous substances’ name and concentration.
有毒有害物质或元素
部件名称 Hazardous substances’ name
Component Name
铅 汞 镉 六价铬 多溴联苯 多溴二苯醚
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr(VI)) (PBB) (PBDE)
Generator X O O X O O
Console X O O X O O

O: 表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量要求以下
X: 表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量要求
• 此表所列数据为发布时所能获得的最佳信息
• 由于缺少经济上或技术上合理可行的替代物质或方案,此医疗设备运用以上一些有毒有害物质来实
现设备的预期临床功能,或给人员或环境提供更好的保护效果。

O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for
this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous
materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
• Data listed in the table represents best information available at the time of publication
• Applications of hazardous substances in this medical device are required to achieve its intended
clinical uses, and/or to provide better protection to human beings and/or to environment, due to
lack of reasonably (economically or technically) available substitutes.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V Page 1-7
1 Pre-installation CPI Canada Inc.

1.2.0 SAFETY

1.2.1 Safety and Warning Symbols

The following advisory symbols are used on the safety warning labels, and/or on circuit boards, and/or on
the operator console.

High voltage symbol used to indicate the presence of


high voltage.

Warning symbol used to indicate a potential hazard


to operators, service personnel or to the equipment.
It indicates a requirement to refer to the
accompanying documentation for details.

Radiation exposure symbol used on operator


console. Lights to indicate that an exposure is in
progress. This is accompanied by an audible tone
from the console.

WARNING THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE Radiation warning label on operator console.
DANGEROUS TO PATIENT
AND OPERATOR UNLESS Never allow unqualified personnel to operate the X-
SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS ray generator.
AND OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS ARE
OBSERVED.

1.2.2 Safety Notices and Warnings

WARNING: THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUS TO PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS
SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ARE OBSERVED.

WARNING: PROPER USE AND SAFE OPERATING PRACTICES WITH RESPECT TO X-RAY
GENERATORS ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF USERS OF SUCH GENERATORS.
CPI CANADA INC. PROVIDES INFORMATION ON ITS PRODUCTS AND
ASSOCIATED HAZARDS, BUT ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITIES FOR AFTER-
SALE OPERATING AND SAFETY PRACTICES.

THE MANUFACTURER ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY GENERATOR


NOT MAINTAINED OR SERVICED ACCORDING TO THIS SERVICE AND
INSTALLATION MANUAL, OR FOR ANY GENERATOR THAT HAS BEEN MODIFIED
IN ANY WAY.

THE MANUFACTURER ALSO ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR X-RAY


RADIATION OVEREXPOSURE OF PATIENTS OR PERSONNEL RESULTING FROM
POOR OPERATING TECHNIQUES OR PROCEDURES.

Page 1-8 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V
CPI Canada Inc. Pre-installation 1

1.2.2 Safety Notices and Warnings (Cont)

X-ray radiation exposure may be damaging to health, with some effects being cumulative and extending
over periods of many months or even years. Operators and service personnel should avoid any
exposure to the primary beam and take protective measures to safeguard against scatter radiation.
Scatter radiation is caused by any object in the path of the primary beam and may be of equal or less
intensity than the primary beam that exposes the film.

No practical design can incorporate complete protection for operators or service personnel who do not
take adequate safety precautions. Only authorized and properly trained service and operating
personnel should be allowed to work with this X-ray generator equipment. The appropriate
personnel must be made aware of the inherent dangers associated with the servicing of high voltage
equipment and the danger of excessive exposure to X-ray radiation during system operation.

DO NOT CONNECT UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT TO THE REAR OF THE


CONSOLE.
For the membrane console, J3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J4 is a
serial port for use by an external computer, and J8 is for the interconnect cable to the
main cabinet.
For the touch screen console, J2 on the touch screen interface board is for the
interconnect cable to the generator, J3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J5
connects to the membrane switch assembly with the on / off and prep / expose
switches, and J4 is a serial port for use by an external computer.
INCORRECT CONNECTIONS OR USE OF UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT MAY
RESULT IN INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.

CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED THE TUBE MAXIMUM OPERATING LIMITS. INTENDED LIFE AND
RELIABILITY WILL NOT BE OBTAINED UNLESS GENERATORS ARE OPERATED
WITHIN PUBLISHED SPECIFICATIONS.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V Page 1-9
1 Pre-installation CPI Canada Inc.

1.2.2 Safety Notices and Warnings (Cont)

WARNING: HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES EXIST INSIDE THE GENERATOR WHENEVER THE MAIN
POWER DISCONNECT IS SWITCHED ON. THESE AREAS INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT
LIMITED TO, THE MAIN FUSE HOLDER AND ASSOCIATED CIRCUITS ON THE H.V.
AUXILIARY BOARD, THE AUXILIARY AND / OR TOUCHSCREEN TRANSFORMERS,
AND THE MAIN POWER CONTACTOR.
LED DS1 ON THE H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD INDICATES THE PRESENCE OF THE
+24 VDC SUPPLY.
THE CONSOLE ON/OFF SWITCH DOES NOT DISCONNECT THE MAIN POWER
FROM THE ABOVE AREAS INSIDE THE GENERATOR.
THE DC BUS CAPACITORS, LOCATED IN THE MAIN CABINET PRESENT A
SAFETY HAZARD FOR AT LEAST 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER HAS BEEN
REMOVED FROM THE UNIT. CHECK THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE
DISCHARGED BEFORE SERVICING THE GENERATOR.
AN LED CONNECTED ACROSS THE DC BUS INDICATES THE PRESENCE OF HIGH
VOLTAGE. THIS LED IS MOUNTED ON THE EMC CAPACITOR BOARD (ON SOME
MODELS, THE EMC CAPACITOR BOARD DOES NOT CONTAIN ANY
COMPONENTS OTHER THAN THE LED AND THE SERIES RESISTORS).
DO NOT RELY SOLELY ON BLEEDER CIRCUITS AND HIGH-VOLTAGE ON
INDICATORS IN THE GENERATOR TO PROTECT YOU. DUE TO THE
POSSIBILITY OF COMPONENT FAILURE, IT MUST NEVER BE ASSUMED
THAT AN UNLIT LED ENSURES THAT NO HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT.
USING A VOLTMETER, CONFIRM THAT NO HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT
BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY SERVICE.

1.2.3 Safety Warning Labels

This subsection defines the safety labels used inside and outside the generator cabinet.

NOTE: THESE LABELS AND WARNINGS ARE PROVIDED TO ALERT SERVICE


PERSONNEL THAT SERIOUS INJURY WILL RESULT IF THE HAZARD IDENTIFIED
IS IGNORED.

WARNING: SWITCH OFF THE MAIN POWER DISCONNECT AND ALLOW SUFFICIENT TIME
FOR ALL CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE REMOVING ANY COVERS.

WARNING: IF ANY COVERS MUST BE REMOVED FOR SERVICE, TAKE ALL REQUIRED
PRECAUTIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE HAZARD(S) AND IMMEDIATELY
REPLACE THE COVERS WHEN THE NEED FOR REMOVAL IS COMPLETED.

This information is provided to help you establish safe operating conditions for both you and your X-ray
generator. Do not operate this X-ray generator except in accordance with these instructions, and any
additional information provided by the X-ray generator manufacturer and / or competent safety
authorities.

Page 1-10 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V
CPI Canada Inc. Pre-installation 1

1.2.3 Safety Warning Labels (Cont)

Weight Label

This label is attached to the main generator cabinet and to the HT tank, and states the approximate
weight of the main cabinet with the HT tank, and the weight of the HT tank separately. Do not attempt to
lift these items without proper assistance.

Caution HV/High Energy Warning Label

This label is attached to the generator cabinet and on the inside of the back cover above the HT tank.
The DC bus capacitors (approximately 300 to 670 VDC, depending on model) will remain charged for up
to 5 minutes after the AC mains is disconnected or the console is switched off.

Caution HV Behind Cover Label

This label is attached to the outside of the generator cabinet, to the cover over the inverter assembly, and
to the cover in front of the touchscreen fusing board. Mains voltage is present inside the cabinet
whenever the main disconnect is switched on. Additionally, the DC bus capacitors will remain charged for
up to 5 minutes after the AC mains is disconnected or the console is switched off.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V Page 1-11
1 Pre-installation CPI Canada Inc.

1.2.3 Safety Warning Labels (Cont)

WARNING: WAIT A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE INPUT MAINS POWER HAS BEEN
REMOVED BEFORE REMOVING ANY COVERS. ONCE THE COVER(S) ARE
REMOVED. CHECK THAT THE VOLTAGE ACROSS THE DC BUS CAPACITORS IS
NEAR ZERO BEFORE SERVICING. IF THIS VOLTAGE EXCEEDS 48 VDC, THE
CAPACITORS MUST BE MANUALLY DISCHARGED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.

HT Tank - Transformer Terminals Notice

This notice is printed on the HT tank lid and cautions against over-tightening the nuts on the transformer
feedthrough terminals (for the primary of the HT transformers).

Danger High Tension Notice

This notice is printed on the HT tank lid. High voltage may be present at the primary terminals on the tank
lid board, at the output high voltage connectors, and at the mA/mAs measuring jacks if the shorting link is
opened for mA/mAs measurements.

HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Be certain that you are aware of all potential high voltage
locations and hazards as detailed in this section before removing any covers, or attempting
any service on this X-ray generator.

Page 1-12 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V
CPI Canada Inc. Pre-installation 1

1.2.3 Safety Warning Labels (Cont)

FUSE RATINGS:
LOCATION 1 PHASE UNITS 3 PHASE UNITS
MAIN LINE FUSES: F1, F2: FRN-R-50 * F1, F2, F3: AG40 *
(32/40 kW).
F1, F2, F3: SC60 *
(50 kW).
GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD: F1: GDC-1A * F1: GDC-1A *
CONSOLE BOARD: F1: GDC-1A * F1: GDC-1A *

ALL 208/230 V UNITS ALL 400/480 V UNITS


H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD: F1, F6, F7: S506-8A * F1, F6, F7: S506-8A *
F2, F3: GDC-3.15A * F2, F3: GDC-3.15A *
F4, F5, F11: GDC-6.3A * F4, F5: FNQ-1 *
F8, F9, F12: GDC-2A * F8, F9: FNQ 2 *
F10: GDC-1A * F10: GDC-1A *
F11: GDC-6.3A *
F12: GDC-2A *

* Refer to chapter 8, spares list, for CPI part number for these fuses.

HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 400 VAC is present on the console board in the
area of T1, C36, and J5. This is a high voltage source for the fluorescent backlight on the LCD
display.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: AC mains voltage and / or DC bus voltage (approximately 325 to
670 VDC, depending on model) is present on the H.V. auxiliary board whenever the AC mains
is energized. Ensure that the AC mains is switched off and locked out before servicing this
board. See the note below regarding the DC bus voltage.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: High voltage is present on all components connected to the AC
mains (line fuses, main power contactor, H.V. auxiliary board, auxiliary and / or touchscreen
transformer, etc) whenever the AC mains is switched on. Additionally, DC bus voltage is
present on certain components (mains rectifier assembly, DC bus capacitors, inverter
assembly, HT tank, H.V. auxiliary board, etc) whenever the generator is switched on, and will
remain on for up to 5 minutes after the console is switched off or the AC mains is switched off
or disconnected.

DANGEROUS
VOLTAGE
High voltage (approximately 325 to 670 VDC, depending on model) is present on the inverter
assembly and associated components whenever the AC mains is energized and the console
is switched on, and for up to 5 minutes after the console is switched off or the AC mains is
disconnected. THIS COMBINATION OF HIGH VOLTAGE AND HIGH CURRENT IS
POTENTIALLY LETHAL. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING THIS UNIT.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V Page 1-13
1 Pre-installation CPI Canada Inc.

1.3.0 PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION

1.3.1 Generator Heat Output

The maximum heat output of the main generator cabinet is less than 1000 BTU / hour in normal clinical
use, with a maximum of 70 BTU / hour heat output for the console. The console is primarily conduction
cooled, and the main cabinet is fan cooled. The console and main cabinet should never be covered when
the generator is switched on, as any covering may interfere with the cooling.

1.3.2 Generator Power Requirements

The tables in this section show mains power requirements for various configurations of CMP 200 X-ray
generators. The installer must ensure that the generator is connected to the proper mains voltage as per
the nameplate on the generator.

The table below depicts the power requirements for the 30 kW CMP 200 X-ray generators.
Line Voltage 208 VAC - 5% to 230 VAC + 10%, 1 phase.

Line Frequency 50/60 Hz.

Momentary Current 185 Amps at 230 VAC.

Nominal Current * ≤5 Amps.

Momentary Power Consumption 43 kVA.

The table below depicts the power requirements for the 32 kW CMP 200 X-ray generators.
Line Voltage 208 VAC - 5% to 230 VAC + 10%, 3 phase.
400 VAC ± 10%, 3 phase.
480 VAC ± 10%, 3 phase.

Line Frequency 50/60 Hz.

Momentary Current 110 Amps/phase at 230 VAC.


65 Amps/phase at 400 VAC.
55 Amps/phase at 480 VAC.

Nominal Current * ≤5 Amps.

Momentary Power Consumption 45 kVA.

Page 1-14 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V
CPI Canada Inc. Pre-installation 1

1.3.2 Generator Power Requirements (Cont)

The table below depicts the power requirements for the 40 kW CMP 200 X-ray generators.
Line Voltage 208 VAC - 5% to 230 VAC + 10%, 1 phase.
208 VAC - 5% to 230 VAC + 10%, 3 phase.
400 VAC ± 10%, 3 phase.
480 VAC ± 10%, 3 phase.

Line Frequency 50/60 Hz.

Momentary Current 250 Amps at 230 VAC (1 phase).


135 Amps/phase at 230 VAC (3 phase).
80 Amps/phase at 400 VAC.
65 Amps/phase at 480 VAC.

Nominal Current * ≤5 Amps.

Momentary Power Consumption 55 kVA.

The table below depicts the power requirements for the 50 kW CMP 200 X-ray generators.
Line Voltage 208 VAC - 5% to 230 VAC + 10%, 3 phase.
400 VAC ± 10%, 3 phase.
480 VAC ± 10%, 3 phase.

Line Frequency 50/60 Hz.

Momentary Current 170 Amps/phase at 230 VAC.


100 Amps/phase at 400 VAC.
80 Amps/phase at 480 VAC.

Nominal Current * ≤5 Amps.

Momentary Power Consumption 69 kVA.

* Nominal Current = Generator standby current only. External or installer-supplied equipment


connected to the generator may increase the nominal current beyond the values shown.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V Page 1-15
1 Pre-installation CPI Canada Inc.

1.3.2 Generator Power Requirements (Cont)

The following table defines the power line requirements for the generators.

NOTE: THE FOLLOWING TABLE CONTAINS RECOMMENDED VALUES FOR THE WIRE SIZES BETWEEN
THE MAINS DISCONNECT AND THE GENERATOR. THE ACTUAL VALUES USED AT AN
INSTALLATION ARE DEPENDENT ON THE QUALITY OF THE INPUT LINE (VOLTAGE LEVEL), THE
CURRENT REQUIREMENTS, AND THE LENGTH OF THE CABLE RUN, AND MUST BE CONFIRMED
BY THE INSTALLER.
FINAL SELECTION OF GENERATOR INPUT WIRE AND DISCONNECTS AS WELL AS THE
CABLING FROM THE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER TO THE MAINS DISCONNECT MUST MEET
THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LOCAL ELECTRICAL CODES, AND IS USUALLY DETERMINED BY
HOSPITAL / CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING.
THE RATINGS LISTED CONSIDER THE GENERATOR REQUIREMENTS ONLY. THE INSTALLER
MUST MAKE THE NECESSARY COMPENSATION FOR ADDITIONAL LOAD REQUIREMENTS.
A POOR QUALITY INPUT LINE MAY RESULT IN THE INSTALLER HAVING TO
DERATE THE GENERATOR'S MAXIMUM POWER.

Generator Series Minimum Generator Minimum Minimum Minimum Apparent


and Mains Voltage Recommended Momentary Recommended Recommended Recommended Mains
Mains Line Current Generator Distribution Ground Resistance
Disconnect to Service Rating Transformer Wire
Generator Rating Size
(15 ft/5 m max) *
30 kW #4 185 A 120 A 45 kVa #4 0.06 Ω
208-230 VAC, 1p. (21 mm2) (21 mm2)
32 kW #4 110 A 100 A 45 kVa #4 0.09 Ω
208-230 VAC, 3p. (21 mm2) (21 mm2)
32 kW #6 65 A 100 A 45 kVa #6 0.27 Ω
400 VAC, 3p. (13.3 mm2) (13.3 mm2)
32 kW #6 55 A 100 A 45 kVa #6 0.40 Ω
480 VAC, 3p. (13.3 mm2) (13.3 mm2)
40 kW #2 250 A 120 A 65 kVa #2 0.045 Ω
208-230 VAC, 1p. (33 mm2) (33 mm2)
40 kW #4 135 A 100 A 55 kVa #4 0.075 Ω
2
208-230 VAC, 3p. (21 mm ) (21 mm2)
40 kW #6 80 A 100 A 55 kVa #6 0.22 Ω
400 VAC, 3p. (13.3 mm2) (13.3 mm2)
40 kW #6 65 A 100 A 55 kVa #6 0.32 Ω
2
480 VAC, 3p. (13.3 mm ) (13.3 mm2)
50 kW #4 170 A 100 A 65 kVa #4 0.055 Ω
208-230 VAC, 3p. (21 mm2) (21 mm2)
50 kW #6 100 A 100 A 65 kVa #6 0.17 Ω
2
400 VAC, 3p (13.3 mm ) (13.3 mm2)
50 kW #6 80 A 100 A 65 kVa #6 0.24 Ω
480 VAC, 3p. (13.3 mm2) (13.3 mm2)

* Refer to 1.3.3 for general grounding information.

Page 1-16 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V
CPI Canada Inc. Pre-installation 1

1.3.2 Generator Power Requirements (Cont)

Recommended Service Disconnect: As per the above table

• All wiring and grounding should comply with the national electrical code or equivalent.
• All wiring must be copper.
• The disconnect switch shall be located within reach of the operator.

1.3.3 Generator Ground Requirements

• A suitable ground must be connected from the disconnect switch to the main ground of the generator,
located to the right of the main fuse block. The ground wire is typically part of the line cord, and the
current capacity of the ground conductor must normally be equal to or greater than that of the line
conductors.
• A copper ground cable, #10 AWG (6 mm2) or larger should be connected from the X-ray tube housing
to the H.T. tank ground stud (located at the top of the HT tank).
• If a neutral line is provided with the system, under no circumstances is it to be used for ground
purposes. The ground must carry fault currents only.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V Page 1-17
1 Pre-installation CPI Canada Inc.

1.3.4 Locating and Mounting the Generator

The main generator cabinet is self-standing and does not need to be supported. However, the installation
should meet the following requirements:
• The floor must be flat and level.
• The generator installation area must be clean and free of dirt or debris.
• The installer must supply generator hold-down brackets, if required. Alternately, mounting holes may
be drilled in the base of the generator. The generator may then be anchored to the floor via these
holes.
• Sufficient room must be provided to allow access to the rear and side of the generator for installation
and service. See figure 1-1 for recommended clearances.
• A cable trough, conduit, or raceway (1 in; 2.5 mm, diameter) should be provided from the control
console to the main cabinet to allow routing of the control cable if required.
• The control console is normally freestanding on a desk or shelf. It may be anchored if necessary.

Figure 1-1: Generator clearances

Page 1-18 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V
CPI Canada Inc. Pre-installation 1

1.3.5 Cable Entrance and Seismic Center Location

Figure 1-2 shows the locations of the cable access slots, the AC mains cable entry, and the seismic
center location for the CMP 200 X-ray generator.

Figure 1-2: CMP 200 cable entry locations and seismic center

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V Page 1-19
1 Pre-installation CPI Canada Inc.

1.3.6 Tools and test Equipment Required

The following is a checklist of recommended tools and test equipment for installation and calibration of
the generator.

CHECK √ DESCRIPTION
General hand tools for installation: Wrenches, nut drivers, assortment of
screwdrivers, pliers, etc.
If the generator is to be anchored to the floor, suitable tools (i.e. drill, drill bits,
etc) and mounting hardware must be available.
A supply of connectors for wiring: terminal lugs, caps, splices etc.
A calibrated DVM that indicates true RMS voltages.
Dual trace memory oscilloscope with a minimum 20 MHz bandwidth;
appropriate leads, probes, etc.
Device for measuring true kVp. This may be a Dynalyzer equivalent or a non-
invasive meter such as the Keithley TRIAD system.
A calibrated radiation meter with detectors that will allow for R/min and uR
type measurements (or uGy and Gy/min).
A suitable mA / mAs meter.
A strobe or reed type tachometer to verify that the anode is rotating up to
speed.
A sufficient selection of absorbers to allow AEC calibration if this option is
fitted. A suggested selection is Lexan in thickness of 5.0, 10.0, and 15.0 cm,
or water in plastic containers of homogenous density in thickness of 5.0, 10.0,
and 15.0 cm.
Vapor proof compound for the HT terminations.

1.3.7 Pre-Installation Checklist

Before starting the generator installation, review the following checklist.

CHECK √ DESCRIPTION
Is there an unloading area to transport the generator from the delivery truck to
the inside of the building?
If the installation is not on the same floor as the delivery entrance, is there an
elevator available?
Is there a transport dolly or similar device to move the generator?
Do any regulatory bodies need to be notified prior to installation?
If movers are required, have arrangements for time and equipment been
completed?
Are lifting straps or some other suitable device available to lift the generator off
the shipping pallet?

Page 1-20 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V
CPI Canada Inc. Pre-installation 1

1.4.0 GENERATOR LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS

The dimensions and weight of the generator are shown in the table below.

ITEM LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT WEIGHT


Main cabinet in shipping pack 30.5 (775) 21.5 (546) 38 (965) 129 (59)
Main cabinet unpacked 22.8 (580) 13.7 (348) 24.3 (617) 113 (51)
Control console 12.3 (313) 10.9 (277) 3.7 (94) 6 (2.72)
The above dimensions are inches (mm), weights are in pounds (Kg).

Figures 1-3 and 1-4 show the major components located inside the generator cabinet. Figure 1-5 is an
internal view of the console, showing the major components and cabling. Figure 1-3 does not show the
fan-mounting bracket, nor does it represent all models. This is meant to show major component layout
only.

Figure 1-3: Major generator subassemblies view 1

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V Page 1-21
1 Pre-installation CPI Canada Inc.

1.4.0 GENERATOR LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS (Cont)

H.V. AUXILIARY
BOARD

GENERATOR
CONTROL BOARD

U6

EPROM
AEC BOARD

TOUCHSCREEN
BATTERY TRANSFORMER
(OPTIONAL)

FILAMENT
BOARD

“LOAD DEFAULTS” POSITION


JW2

“NORMAL” POSITION
JW2

CMP200_007A.CDR

Figure 1-4: Major generator subassemblies view 2

Page 1-22 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V
CPI Canada Inc. Pre-installation 1

1.4.0 GENERATOR LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS (Cont)

Figure 1-5: Console internal view including EPROM location

1.5.0 COMPATIBILITY LISTING

This X-ray generator is compatible with the following equipment:

X-RAY TUBES:

Refer to the compatibility statement at the end of this chapter.

NOTE: THE LOW SPEED STARTER IS COMPATIBLE WITH “R” TYPE STATORS OR GE 23/23 Ω
EQUAL IMPEDANCE STATORS. REFER TO THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT OR THE SECTION
“LOW SPEED STARTER TUBE COMPATIBILITY” IN CHAPTER 2 TO DETERMINE THE
COMPATIBILITY OF YOUR GENERATOR.

AEC DEVICES:

Refer to the compatibility statement at the end of this chapter.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V Page 1-23
1 Pre-installation CPI Canada Inc.

1.6.0 CUSTOMER SUPPORT

Address any questions regarding X-ray generator operation to:

Mail: Customer Support Department


Communications and Power Industries Canada Inc.
45 River Drive
Georgetown, Ontario, Canada L7G 2J4

Telephone: (905) 877-0161

Fax: (905) 877-8320


Attention: Customer Support Department

E-mail: [email protected]
Attention: Customer Support Department

1.7.0 COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT

The compatibility statement for this generator follows this page.

Page 1-24 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V
CPI Canada Inc. Pre-installation 1

REPLACE THIS PAGE WITH

“COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT” form

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V Page 1-25
1 Pre-installation CPI Canada Inc.

(This page intentionally left blank)

Page 1-26 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-01 Rev. V
CPI Canada Inc. Installation 2

Chapter 2

INSTALLATION
CONTENTS:

2.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 2-2


2.2.0 UNPACKING ............................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.3.0 REMOVING THE GENERATOR COVER ................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................................................................................. 2-3
2.5.0 EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT ..................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.5.1 Main Cabinet ......................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.5.2 Control Console .................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.5.3 Anchoring the Generator to the Floor ................................................................................................... 2-4
2.6.0 WIRING TO THE GENERATOR .............................................................................................................. 2-4
2.6.1 Control Console .................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.6.2 Hand Switch (Optional) ......................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.6.3 Stator Connections................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.6.4 Thermal Switch ..................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.6.5 Power Line Mains.................................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.6.6 High Tension Cables........................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.6.7 X-Ray Tube Housing Ground.............................................................................................................. 2-10
2.6.8 Room Equipment ................................................................................................................................ 2-11
2.6.9 Safety Interlocks.................................................................................................................................. 2-11
2.7.0 LOW SPEED STARTER TUBE COMPATIBILITY ................................................................................. 2-11
2.7.1 Setting 120 / 240 VAC Boost Voltage ................................................................................................. 2-11
2.7.2 Low Speed Starter Tube Select Table ................................................................................................ 2-12
2.8.0 INITIAL RUN-UP..................................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.8.1 Auxiliary Transformer Line Voltage Tap Selection.............................................................................. 2-14
2.8.2 Touchscreen Transformer Line Voltage Tap Selection ...................................................................... 2-16
2.8.3 Initial Voltage Measurements.............................................................................................................. 2-17
2.9.0 TUBE MA AUTO CALIBRATION............................................................................................................ 2-18
2.10.0 FINAL CHECKS...................................................................................................................................... 2-18

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U Page 2-1
2 Installation CPI Canada Inc.

2.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This chapter contains instructions for unpacking, positioning, and cabling the CMP 200 X-ray generator,
allowing for initial power-up and tube auto calibration.

2.2.0 UNPACKING

1. Inspect the pack for evidence of shipping damage. If there is evidence of shipping damage, note
this in the event that a damage claim is justified.

2. Remove the cardboard outer pack. See the cautionary note below before removing the pack.

CAUTION: OPEN THE CARDBOARD PACK CAREFULLY. SHARP TOOLS MAY DAMAGE THE
CONTENTS.

3. Set aside the cardboard pack(s).

WARNING: THE GENERATOR MAIN CABINET (WITH HT OIL TANK) WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY
113 POUNDS (51 KG).
ONE PERSON SHOULD NOT ATTEMPT TO LIFT OR MOVE THIS ASSEMBLY
WITHOUT PROPER EQUIPMENT OR ASSISTANCE.

4. Carefully lift the generator from the pallet.

5. Inspect for internal and external shipping damage.

6. Remove and unpack the control console.

7. Unpack the manuals and any other paperwork that may be packed with the generator.

8. Keep the shipping containers. In case of shipping damage, place the unit back in its shipping
pack and notify the carrier and the customer support department as per chapter 1 of this manual.

Page 2-2 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U
CPI Canada Inc. Installation 2

2.3.0 REMOVING THE GENERATOR COVER

1. Remove and set aside the screws and washers securing the cover to the generator chassis.

2. Carefully lift the cover off the chassis.

2.4.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT

Refer to GENERATOR LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS in chapter 1 for major component
identification and layout.

2.5.0 EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT

2.5.1 Main Cabinet

Place the generator cabinet in a location that will allow the following:

• Easy front and side access for service and sufficient clearance at the rear for room interface cables.
Refer to chapter 1.
• Air circulation: The main cabinet is fan cooled. Therefore room-temperature air must be free to
circulate around the cabinet, and the cooling slots in the cabinet must be unobstructed at all times.
• Stable footing.
• Close proximity to service disconnect boxes. Cables should not be on the floor where they could be
stepped on.

2.5.2 Control Console

Position the control console in its intended location and ensure that it is stable.

• If the console is located on a shelf, supply index pins or equivalent hardware to the base of the
console to prevent slipping.
• Ensure that the console is mounted at a height and angle to allow easy viewing of the displays.
• Leave sufficient slack in the cabling to the console to allow for future service and maintenance.

Note: In some jurisdictions, regulations demand that the console PREP and EXPOSE buttons be
disabled if a hand switch assembly is being employed. This is done by removing JW1 and JW2 from the
Console CPU Board.

1. Turn the console upside down and place on a clean, non-abrasive surface.
2. Remove and set aside the hardware from the console ground stud and the six screws securing the
base to the molded case.
3. Remove the console bottom (the metal bottom panel with the feet attached).
4. Locate and remove JW1 and JW2. Refer to appropriate figure in chapter 1, in section GENERATOR
LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS.
5. Reassemble the console using all the original hardware.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U Page 2-3
2 Installation CPI Canada Inc.

2.5.2 Control Console (Cont)

NOTE: DO NOT LOCATE THE CONTROL CONSOLE WHERE X-RADIATION MAY BE


PRESENT DURING INSTALLATION OR OPERATION.

YOU MAY CHOOSE TO TEMPORARILY LOCATE THE CONSOLE NEAR THE GENERATOR FOR
INITIAL PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION. IF THIS IS SO, PLEASE COMPLETE THE FINAL
CONSOLE INSTALLATION PER THIS SECTION WHEN THE GENERATOR INSTALLATION IS
COMPLETED.

2.5.3 Anchoring the Generator to the Floor

If it is desired to anchor the generator to the floor, refer to chapter 1. This should not be done until all
cable hookups to the generator are completed.

2.6.0 WIRING TO THE GENERATOR

Unless specified otherwise, all cables (except AC mains) should be routed into the generator main
cabinet through the cable access slots at the upper rear of the generator. The cables should be secured
to the lip on the inside of the cable access slots using tie wraps or equivalent fasteners. For connections
that must be made to the H.V. auxiliary board, AEC board, or to the generator control board, route the
cables over the top of the fan-mounting bracket and over the chassis divider panel.
The AC mains cable is routed into the generator via the cable clamp on the rear of the generator,
adjacent to the main fuses.
All cables should be kept away from high voltage areas in the cabinet, and dressed neatly in
place. Cables should be cut to the correct length if possible, as excess cabling may contribute to EMI/RFI
problems. For those cables that cannot be cut to the correct length (HT cables and console cables for
example), try to minimize the area inside of any loops of excess cable, as these loops can create an
antenna.
Ferrules should be used on the ends of all stranded wires that are connected to terminal
connections in the generator. These must be supplied by the installer.

EXCESS LENGTHS OF CABLING MUST NEVER BE BUNDLED UP AND STORED INSIDE THE
GENERATOR.

2.6.1 Control Console

1. Route the generator end of the console cable into the generator cabinet via the cable access slot
nearest to the generator control board. The membrane console uses a cable with an RJ45
ethernet-style connector at each end. The touchscreen console uses a cable with an RJ45
ethernet-style connector at the generator end, and a 15-pin “D” connector at the other end.

2. Connect the console cable to J3 on the generator control board. Route the console cable as per
figure 2-1.

3. Connect the free end of the console cable as follows.


For the membrane console, connect the free end of the console cable to J8 at the rear of the
console.
For the touchscreen console, connect the free end of the console cable to J2 on the touchscreen
interface board at the rear of the console.
Ensure that the screw locks are fully tightened to secure the connectors.

Page 2-4 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U
CPI Canada Inc. Installation 2

2.6.1 Control Console (Cont)

4. FOR THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE ONLY:


a) Connect one end of the supplied ground wire to the touchscreen console ground screw,
shown in figure 2-2. On some configurations of touch screen consoles, the viewing-angle
adjustment screws may need to be removed, and the console tilted forward in order to be
able to access the ground connection.
Connect the other end of the ground wire to one of the ground studs securing the CMP
touchscreen fusing board to the chassis. To do this, remove the hex nut and flat washer,
install the ground wire on the mounting stud, and then reinstall the flat washer and hex nut.
b) Connect the supplied line cord from the rear of the touchscreen to J2 on the CMP
touchscreen fusing board.
c) Dress the ground wire and line cord away from high voltage areas in the generator.

Figure 2-1: Console cable routing

5. Figure 2-2 shows the designations of the connectors on the rear panel of the control console.

DO NOT CONNECT UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT TO THE REAR OF THE CONSOLE.


For the membrane console, J3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J4 is a serial port
for use by an external computer, and J8 is for the interconnect cable to the generator main
cabinet.
For the touch screen console, J2 on the touch screen interface board is for the interconnect
cable to the generator, J3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J5 connects to the
membrane switch assembly with the on / off and prep / expose switches, and J4 is a serial
port for use by an external computer.
INCORRECT CONNECTIONS OR USE OF UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT IN
INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U Page 2-5
2 Installation CPI Canada Inc.

2.6.1 Control Console (Cont)

MEMBRANE CONSOLE

CONSOLE J8
J3 GROUND GENERATOR J4
HAND LCD INTERFACE DATA
SWITCH CONTRAST LINK

TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE

J4
DATA
CONSOLE LINK
GROUND
J2
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
J3
HAND
SWITCH J5
MEMBRANE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(ON / OFF AND PREP / X-RAY
SWITCHES)

CMP RAD_CONS.CDR

Figure 2-2: Rear of control console

2.6.2 Hand Switch (Optional)

The optional hand switch, if ordered from CPI Canada Inc, is supplied pre-wired to a male 9 pin
subminiature ‘D’ connector. This connects to J3 on the rear of the console. A male 9 pin subminiature ‘D’
connector will need to be provided by the installer if the CPI supplied hand switch is not used.
Pin assignments are as follows:

PIN NUMBER J3 PIN CONNECTIONS


1 X-ray
2 No Connection
3 Prep
4 No Connection
5 Common (ground)
6 NOT USED
7 NOT USED
8 NOT USED
9 NOT USED

Page 2-6 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U
CPI Canada Inc. Installation 2

2.6.3 Stator Connections

Refer to figure 2-3 for the X-ray tube stator and thermal switch connections.

1. Route the X-ray tube stator cable to the stator terminal block J7 on the H.V. auxiliary board. This
is shown in figure 2-3.

USE OF A SHIELDED STATOR CABLE IS RECOMMENDED. THE SHIELD FOR THE


STATOR CABLE MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED AT BOTH THE TUBE END AND THE
GENERATOR END OF THE CABLE. CONNECT THE GENERATOR END OF THE SHIELD TO
THE GROUND TERMINAL ON J7.

2. Connect the X-ray tube stator connections and the thermal switch connections to J7 on the H.V.
auxiliary board terminal block as per the table below.

J7
6 5 4 3 2 1

CMP200_STATOR

Figure 2-3: Stator connections to H.V. auxiliary board

FUNCTION CONNECT TO
SHIFT J7-6
MAIN J7-5
COMMON J7-4
GROUND J7-3
THERMAL SWITCH (Term 1) J7-2
THERMAL SWITCH (Term 2) J7-1

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U Page 2-7
2 Installation CPI Canada Inc.

2.6.4 Thermal Switch

Refer to 2.6.3 for the X-ray tube thermal switch connections.

2.6.5 Power Line Mains

WARNING: TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, ENSURE THAT THE AC MAINS DISCONNECT IS


LOCKED IN THE OFF POSITION, AND THAT ALL MAINS CABLES ARE DE-
ENERGIZED BEFORE CONNECTING TO THE GENERATOR.

Refer to chapter 1 for generator power and generator power line requirements.

1. Temporarily remove the fan and fan-mounting bracket by removing the three screws that secure
this assembly to the chassis divider panel. Disconnect the fan and set aside the fan and mounting
bracket.

2. Pass the AC mains cable through the cable clamp at the upper rear of the generator cabinet,
adjacent to the main fuses. Tighten the clamps to secure the cable.

3. Strip sufficient cable jacket to allow the ground and AC mains connections to be made in the next
step. Strip the ends of the leads to the required length.

4. Connect the ground wire to the chassis ground connector, and connect the mains power wires to
the terminals on the main fuse holder shown in figure 2-4 (for 1 phase generators connect the
mains to F1 and F2; for 3 phase units connect the mains to F1, F2, and F3).
• Ferrules should be used on the ends of the AC mains wires. These must be supplied by the
installer.
• For China only, the power cable must be CCC approved.

5. Reconnect the fan, and reinstall the fan-mounting bracket by reversing step 1.
Note: Ensure the tabs on the bottom part of the fan mounting bracket are inserted correctly into
the slots on the inside wall of the generator beneath the main fuse block prior to
reinserting the three screws into the chassis divider panel. Verify the tabs are still
inserted correctly after the screws are in place.

6. DO NOT SWITCH ON MAINS POWER UNTIL REQUESTED TO DO SO IN A LATER STEP.

Page 2-8 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U
CPI Canada Inc. Installation 2

2.6.5 Power Line Mains (Cont)

Figure 2-4: Generator mains connection

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U Page 2-9
2 Installation CPI Canada Inc.

2.6.6 High Tension Cables

The X-ray tube should be mounted in its normal fixture i.e. tube stand or other device.

1 Verify that the HT cable terminations are clean, in good condition, and coated with vapor proof
compound.

2. Remove the dust caps that cover the high voltage terminals on the HT oil tank.

3. Connect the anode and cathode cables to the HT tank. Ensure that the cables are plugged into
the proper connectors on the HT tank. Refer to figure 2-5.

4. Be sure that the HT cable connectors are tight and there is no play between the connector
insulator and the screw-down ring.

Figure 2-5: HV connector identification

2.6.7 X-Ray Tube Housing Ground

In addition to the X-ray tube manufacturers recommended tube grounding procedure, a separate ground
wire (10 AWG, 6mm2) must be connected from the X-ray tube housing to one of the ground studs on the
HT tank. Refer to figure 2-5 for the location of these ground studs. These ground locations may have
other ground wires already connected; ensure that these existing ground wires are not disconnected
when making the X-ray tube ground connection.
Failure to make this ground connection may result in intermittent operation and/or exposure errors.

Page 2-10 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U
CPI Canada Inc. Installation 2

2.6.8 Room Equipment

Refer to chapter 3C for connection of Buckys, interlocks, room lights, DAP, and collimator lamp and
system locks power, and to chapter 3D for installation and calibration of AEC. It is suggested that these
items not be connected until after the initial run-up of the generator is complete, and the tube auto
calibration routine has been performed as described near the end of this chapter.

2.6.9 Safety Interlocks

The room door interlock switch must be wired to the generator as described in INPUTS in chapter 3C
prior to power up. This switch will provide a closed contact when the door is closed.

2.7.0 LOW SPEED STARTER TUBE COMPATIBILITY

Before continuing, note the part number of the H.V. auxiliary board in the generator. Part numbers
739442-00 / 739445-00 have a 33 μF phase-shift capacitor, and are compatible with the type “R” stator
tubes listed in table 2-1. Part numbers 739442-01 / 739445-01 have a 45 μF phase-shift capacitor, and
are compatible with the type GE 23/23 Ω stators listed in table 2-1.

Confirm that the boost voltage is set correctly for the selected tube type per table 2-1 before continuing.
The procedure for setting the boost voltage is detailed in 2.7.1. The boost voltage may be measured
across F6 and F7 on the H.V. auxiliary board.

If the desired tube type is not listed, please contact CPI product support for assistance.

Confirm proper stator operation using a suitable tachometer before making any exposures.

WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT ON THE H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD AT ALL TIMES THAT THE
GENERATOR IS SWITCHED ON. TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING
THIS BOARD

2.7.1 Setting 120 / 240 VAC Boost Voltage

Follow the steps below to verify and configure the low speed starter boost voltage. This is factory
configured to 240 VAC.

1 Confirm the required boost voltage for the selected tube as described above. The requirement for
the vast majority of tubes in table 2-1 is 240 V. For tubes that require 120 V boost, this is noted in
the table.

2. The boost voltage is configured via jumpers on the H.V. auxiliary board:
• E16 to E15 selects 240 V boost.
• E14 to E15 selects 120 V boost.
Swap the connection at E14 and E16 if the boost voltage needs to be changed. The jumper wire
(E16 - E15 or E14 - E15) will need to be replaced if making this change. Extra jumper wires are
attached to a bag on the lip on the inside of the cable access slot above the HT tank. Select the
shortest wire from this bag that will connect between the desired tabs on the board and that has
the proper terminations on the jumpers. Do not discard the existing jumper; place it in the jumper
kit to be available for future configuration changes.
Proceed to the next step if the jumper setting is correct.

3. Confirm the proper boost voltage and proper anode rotation as described above.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U Page 2-11
2 Installation CPI Canada Inc.

2.7.1 Setting 120 / 240 VAC Boost Voltage (Cont)

2.7.2 Low Speed Starter Tube Select Table

TABLE 2-1: SUPPORTED TUBE TYPES


TUBE TYPE TUBE TYPE BOOST SHIFT CAPAC H.V. AUXILIARY
(HOUSING) (INSERT) VOLTAGE BOARD PART NO.
Comet DO7 DX7 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
25/50 Ω stator 739445-00
Comet DO9 DX9 0.6/2.0 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
25/50 Ω stator DX9 1.2/2.0 739445-00
Comet DO9 DX91HS 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
25/50 Ω stator DX92HS 739445-00
DX93HS
Comet DO10 DX10HS 0.6/1.0 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
25/50 Ω stator DX10HS 1.0/2.0 739445-00
Comet DX10 DX101HS 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
25/50 Ω stator DX104HS 739445-00
DX105HS
Comet XSTAR8 XST-8 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
XSTAR74 XST-74 739445-00
25/50 Ω stator
GE Maxiray 75 0.6/1.0 11° 240 VAC 45 μF 739442-01
3” anode 0.6/1.5 15° 739445-01
23/23 Ω equal 1.0/2.0 15°
impedance “E” stator
GE Maxiray 100 0.3/1.0 11° 240 VAC 45 μF 739442-01
4” anode 0.6/1.0 11° 739445-01
23/23 Ω equal 0.6/1.2 11°
impedance “E” stator 0.6/1.5 11°
0.6/1.5 12°
0.6/1.25 12.5°
1.0/2.0 15°
Gilardoni AR11-30 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
Rotagil S/AS AR30-60 739445-00
Philips RO 17/50 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
ROT350 SRO 22/50 739445-00
ROT351 SRO 33/100
Toshiba Rotanode E7132X 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
XH-121 739445-00
Varian A102 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
B100 A132 739445-00
DX52 A142
Std “R” stator
Varian A102 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
B100 A132 739445-00
“STD” stator A142

Page 2-12 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U
CPI Canada Inc. Installation 2

2.7.2 Low Speed Starter Tube Select Table (Cont)

TUBE TYPE TUBE TYPE BOOST SHIFT CAPAC H.V. AUXILIARY


(HOUSING) (INSERT) VOLTAGE BOARD PART NO.
Varian A192 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
B130 A272 739445-00
B150 A282
Std “R” stator A286
A292
G256
G292
Varian RAD13 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
Diamond RAD14 0.3/1.2 739445-00
Std “R” stator RAD14 0.6/1.2
RAD14 0.6/1.5
Varian RAD 8 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
Emerald RAD 68 739445-00
Std “R” stator RAD 74
Varian RAD21 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
Saphire RAD56 0.6/1.0 739445-00
Std “R” stator RAD56 0.6/1.2
RAD60
RAD92
RAD94
Varian DX62 A192B 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
300-400 kHu, A197 739445-00
“STD” stator A256
A272
A282
A286
A292
Varian DX62U A192B 240 VAC 33 μF 739442-00
Universal A197 739445-00
300-400 kHu, A256
configured as “STD” or A272
“R” stator A282
A286
A292

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U Page 2-13
2 Installation CPI Canada Inc.

2.8.0 INITIAL RUN-UP

This section describes the procedure for auxiliary transformer and touchscreen transformer (if fitted) line
voltage tap selection and for initial power-on of the generator after it has first been installed.

PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS REGARDING THE MAIN DISTRIBUTION


TRANSFORMER:
• IF USING A DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER WITH AN ISOLATED SECONDARY, THE
SECONDARY WINDING MUST BE A WYE (STAR) CONFIGURATION WITH THE CENTER
POINT GROUND REFERENCED. DO NOT USE A DELTA CONFIGURED SECONDARY AS
THERE IS NO GROUND REFERENCE IN THIS CONFIGURATION.
• IF USING AN AUTOTRANSFORMER TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER, THE A.C.
INPUT TO THE TRANSFORMER MUST BE GROUND REFERENCED.

2.8.1 Auxiliary Transformer Line Voltage Tap Selection

For 208 / 230 V generators, the line voltage taps on the auxiliary transformer must be checked before
powering up the generator.
For 400 / 480 V generators, the auxiliary transformer line voltage tap is factory set to match the line
voltage that was specified at the time of the order. If these units are to be operated from other than the
rated line voltage (i.e. if a 400 V generator is to be operated from 480 V mains), the line voltage tap on
the auxiliary transformer must be changed as described below.

For 208 / 230 VAC generators:


1. Verify that the mains voltage and current capacity is correct for the generator installation per
GENERATOR POWER REQUIREMENTS in chapter 1.

2. Locate the auxiliary transformer inside the generator cabinet. Refer to chapter 1. For reference,
this transformer is part number 739446.

3. Note the line-voltage tap position on this transformer as determined by the location of the wire on
the 208V or the 240V tap on the transformer primary. This is normally set to the 240V tap. Refer
to figure 2-6; this shows the front view of the transformer.

4. Based on the nominal line voltage, set the transformer primary voltage tap as follows:
• Loosen the clamping screws for the current line-voltage tap, and for the required line-voltage
tap.
• Connect to the 208 V tap if the line voltage is 215 VAC or less.
• Connect to the 240 V tap if the line voltage is 216 VAC or higher.
• Retighten both of the clamping screws.

Page 2-14 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U
CPI Canada Inc. Installation 2

2.8.1 Auxiliary Transformer Line Voltage Tap Selection (Cont)

Figure 2-6: Auxiliary transformer, terminal view

For 400 / 480 VAC generators:


The 400 / 480 V tap setting only needs to be changed if a 400 V generator is to be operated from 480 V
mains, or if a 480 V generator is to be operated from 400 V.
1. Verify that the mains voltage and current capacity is correct for the generator installation per
GENERATOR POWER REQUIREMENTS in chapter 1.

2. Locate the auxiliary transformer inside the generator cabinet. Refer to chapter 1. For reference,
this transformer is part number 739446.

3. Note the line-voltage tap position on this transformer as determined by the location of the wire on
the 400V or the 480V tap on the transformer primary. This is set to the 400 or 480V tap to match
the line voltage specified at the time of the order. Refer to figure 2-6; this shows the front view of
the transformer.

4. Based on the nominal line voltage, set the transformer primary voltage tap as follows:
• Loosen the clamping screws for the current line-voltage tap, and for the required line-voltage
tap.
• Connect to the 400 V tap if the line voltage is nominally 400 VAC.
• Connect to the 480 V tap if the line voltage is nominally 480 VAC.
• Retighten both of the clamping screws.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U Page 2-15
2 Installation CPI Canada Inc.

2.8.2 Touchscreen Transformer Line Voltage Tap Selection

This applies to 400 / 480 V generators with the optional touchscreen transformer only:
The touchscreen transformer line voltage tap is factory set to match the line voltage that was specified at
the time of the order. If these units are to be operated from other than the rated line voltage (i.e. if a 400 V
generator is to be operated from 480 V mains), the line voltage tap on the touchscreen transformer must
be changed as described below.

1. Verify that the mains voltage and current capacity is correct for the generator installation per
GENERATOR POWER REQUIREMENTS in chapter 1.

2. Locate the touchscreen transformer inside the generator cabinet. The transformer terminals are
accessible via the HT tank side of the chassis, below the EMC capacitor board. Refer to chapter
1.

3. Note the primary tap position on this transformer as determined by the location of the wire on the
400 V or the 480 V tap. This is set to the 400 or 480 V tap to match the line voltage specified at
the time of the order. Refer to figure 2-7; this shows the terminal side of the transformer.

4. Based on the nominal line voltage, set the transformer primary voltage tap as follows:
• Connect to the 400 V tap if the line voltage is nominally 400 VAC.
• Connect to the 480 V tap if the line voltage is nominally 480 VAC.

480V
400V
230V

0V

CMP200_011A.CDR

Figure 2-7: Touchscreen transformer, terminal view

Page 2-16 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U
CPI Canada Inc. Installation 2

2.8.3 Initial Voltage Measurements

1. If the mains supply is compatible with the generator, switch on the main breaker and / or the
disconnect switch and check for the following voltages:

NOTE: DO NOT SWITCH THE GENERATOR ON AT THIS TIME (ONLY THE AC MAINS TO
THE GENERATOR IS TO BE SWITCHED ON).

WARNING: USE EXTREME CARE IN MEASURING THESE VOLTAGES. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT


WITH MAINS VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
MAINS VOLTAGE WILL BE PRESENT INSIDE THE GENERATOR CABINET, EVEN
WITH THE CONSOLE SWITCHED OFF.
THE DC BUS CAPACITORS MAY PRESENT A SAFETY HAZARD FOR A MINIMUM
OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE GENERATOR HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF. CHECK
THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE TOUCHING ANY PARTS
IN THE GENERATOR.

2. Measure and record the voltage across the main line fuses in the generator. Single-phase units
will only use one set of voltage measurements.

L1 phase to L2 phase: ______ VAC. L1 phase to ground: ______ VAC.


L1 phase to L3 phase: ______ VAC. L2 phase to ground: ______ VAC.
L2 phase to L3 phase: ______ VAC. L3 phase to ground: ______ VAC.

3. Are the line to line and line to ground voltages within specification for the unit? For single phase
230 V units, the line to ground voltage should be 99 – 127 V. For 3 phase units, the phase to
ground voltage should be 114 – 146 V for 208 / 230 V units, 230 V ± 10 % for 400 V units, and
277 V ± 10 % for 480 V units.
___ Check

4. Confirm that the auxiliary transformer line and filament voltage taps are set to the appropriate
position as per the measured line voltage.
___ Check

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U Page 2-17
2 Installation CPI Canada Inc.

2.9.0 TUBE MA AUTO CALIBRATION

It is recommended that the generator be tested at this point with only the rotor and high tension cables
connected. The generator should be able to complete an X-ray tube calibration and seasoning cycle
without other equipment connected to the generator (other than the basic interlocks as noted below). This
will allow for easier fault isolation as each section of the system is connected and tested.
Before being able to make X-ray exposures, the room door interlock must be closed and the
thermal switch must be closed.
Before beginning tube auto calibration, the tube(s) used in this installation must be properly
selected, and the generator limits should be programmed. Refer to chapter 3C.
It is recommended that the tube(s) be conditioned (seasoned) before beginning tube auto
calibration, particularly if the tube has not been used for some time. Refer to chapter 6.

2.10.0 FINAL CHECKS

The room interface connections may now be completed. These items are described in 2.6.8.
• When finished all wiring, check that all connections are tight and secure.
• Check that all cables are dressed neatly inside the main cabinet, and secured as necessary.
• Reconnect any grounds that have been removed from covers. Then reinstall all covers before placing
the generator into service.

NOTE: THE INSTALLER SHOULD ENSURE THAT ALL CABLE CONNECTIONS TO THE
GENERATOR ARE SECURE, AND ALL CABLES EXTERNAL TO THE GENERATOR
ARE ADEQUATELY PROTECTED AGAINST ACCIDENTAL DISCONNECTION.

Page 2-18 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-02 Rev. U
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing, Programming, & Calibration 3

CHAPTER 3

INTERFACING, PROGRAMMING, AND


CALIBRATION

3.0.0 INTRODUCTION

3.1.0 Purpose

This chapter describes the interfacing of the CMP 200 X-ray generator to Bucky’s, interlocks, collimator
lamp, etc, and to the AEC chambers (if the AEC option is fitted).
Generator programming and AEC calibration is also covered in this chapter.

This chapter contains the following sections.

Section Title
3A Not Used
3B Not Used
3C Interfacing and Programming
3D AEC (Automatic Exposure Control) calibration

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-03 Rev. A Page 3-1
3 Interfacing, Programming, & Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 3-2 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-03 Rev. A
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C

CHAPTER 3C

INTERFACING AND PROGRAMMING


CONTENTS:

3C.1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................. 3C-3


3C.2.0 WIRING TO INPUTS & OUTPUTS ................................................................................................................. 3C-3
3C.2.1 Inputs ........................................................................................................................................................... 3C-3
3C.2.2 Outputs ........................................................................................................................................................ 3C-4
3C.2.3 Inputs & Outputs (simplified schematic) ...................................................................................................... 3C-6
3C.2.4 AEC Interconnect......................................................................................................................................... 3C-7
3C.3.0 GENERATOR PROGRAMMING..................................................................................................................... 3C-7
3C.3.1 Entering Into Programming Mode................................................................................................................ 3C-7
3C.4.0 GENERATOR SETUP MENU ......................................................................................................................... 3C-8
3C.5.0 UTILITY MENU................................................................................................................................................ 3C-9
3C.5.1 Setting Time And Date............................................................................................................................... 3C-10
3C.5.2 Error Log .................................................................................................................................................... 3C-12
3C.5.3 Statistics..................................................................................................................................................... 3C-13
3C.5.4 Console...................................................................................................................................................... 3C-15
3C.6.0 APR EDITOR................................................................................................................................................. 3C-17
3C.7.0 GENERATOR CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................ 3C-19
3C.7.1 Tube Selection ........................................................................................................................................... 3C-19
3C.7.2 Generator Limits ........................................................................................................................................ 3C-28
3C.7.3 Receptor Setup .......................................................................................................................................... 3C-31
3C.7.4 I/O Configuration........................................................................................................................................ 3C-41
3C.7.5 AEC Setup ................................................................................................................................................. 3C-47
3C.7.6 AEC Calibration ......................................................................................................................................... 3C-51
3C.7.7 Tube Calibration......................................................................................................................................... 3C-51
3C.8.0 DAP PRINTER SETUP ................................................................................................................................. 3C-53
3C.9.0 DAP INTERFACING...................................................................................................................................... 3C-53
3C.9.1 DAP Compatibility ...................................................................................................................................... 3C-53
3C.9.2 DAP Installation ......................................................................................................................................... 3C-54
3C.10.0 DAP SETUP ................................................................................................................................................ 3C-54
3C.10.1 DAP SETUP Menu................................................................................................................................... 3C-54
3C.10.2 DAP SETUP Menu Items......................................................................................................................... 3C-55
3C.11.0 DAP CALIBRATION .................................................................................................................................... 3C-57
3C11.1 Equipment Required ................................................................................................................................. 3C-58
3C.11.2 DAP Calibration Overview ....................................................................................................................... 3C-58
3C.11.3 DAP Calibration Procedure...................................................................................................................... 3C-59
3C.11.4 DAP Calculation Worksheet .................................................................................................................... 3C-61
3C.12.0 DATA LINK .................................................................................................................................................. 3C-63

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-1
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.13.0 TOUCHSCREEN SYSTEM UTILITIES....................................................................................................... 3C-64


3C.13.1 Accessing the Utilities Menu.................................................................................................................... 3C-64
3C.13.2 APR Editor ............................................................................................................................................... 3C-66
3C.13.3 APR Backup / Restore............................................................................................................................. 3C-71
3C.13.4 Date / Time Setup .................................................................................................................................... 3C-73
3C.13.5 Receptor Symbols ................................................................................................................................... 3C-75
3C.13.6 TouchScreen Setup ................................................................................................................................. 3C-76
3C.13.7 TouchScreen Calibration ......................................................................................................................... 3C-81
3C.13.8 Data Link.................................................................................................................................................. 3C-82

Page 3C-2 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the interfacing of the CMP 200 X-ray generator to Bucky(s), interlocks, room lights,
DAP, and collimator lamp and tube stand locks, and also describes the generator programming.

3C.2.0 WIRING TO INPUTS & OUTPUTS

NOTE: THE INSTALLER MUST PROVIDE THE NECESSARY INTERFACING CABLES FOR WIRING TO
THE GENERATOR INPUTS AND OUTPUTS DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION.

WARNING: LINE VOLTAGE IS PRESENT INSIDE THE GENERATOR AT ALL TIMES THAT THE MAIN
DISCONNECT IS SWITCHED ON. FOR SAFETY, THE MAIN DISCONNECT SHOULD BE
SWITCHED OFF AND LOCKED OUT WHILE CONNECTING ROOM EQUIPMENT.

3C.2.1 Inputs

The Bucky inputs, interlock 1 and interlock 2 / tomo inputs, and room door interlock inputs are opto coupled.
This means that a relay contact, transistor, or other low-impedance switching device (≤ 100 Ω, 10 mA current
rating) must be connected across each of these inputs. Table 3C-1 defines the pin outs, polarity at the
terminals and the logic condition required for that input. If using a directional switching device, such as a
transistor, the polarity of the voltage seen by the switching device must be observed. This is shown in the table
below.
Refer also to figure 3C-1. This is a pictorial drawing of the J2, J4, and J11 inputs and outputs on the
H.V. auxiliary board.
Refer to 3C.2.4 for details on AEC connections.

WARNING: DO NOT DEFEAT THE ROOM DOOR INTERLOCK, OR THE INTERLOCK 1 AND 2 INPUTS
UNLESS THE CORRESPONDING DEVICE IS NOT PRESENT. CONSULT THE
APPLICABLE REGULATIONS BEFORE DISABLING ANY EXPOSURE INTERLOCKS. DO
NOT VIOLATE ANY REGULATIONS FOR X-RAY SAFETY.
NEVER BYPASS THE X-RAY TUBE THERMAL SWITCH INTERLOCK.
OBSERVE IONIZING RADIATION PERSONAL PROTECTION AT ALL TIMES.

NOTE: THE BUCKY 1 AND TOMO / BUCKY 2 OUTPUTS MAY BE INSTALLER-


PROGRAMMED. BUCKY 1 WILL NORMALLY BE PROGRAMMED TO
CORRESPOND TO THE TABLE BUCKY, AND BUCKY 2 WILL NORMALLY
BE PROGRAMMED FOR THE WALL BUCKY OR FOR TOMO.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-3
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.2.1 Inputs (Cont)

H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD DEFINITION


J2-5 (-) B2: Bucky 1 ready. A contact closure from pin 5 to 6 indicates
J2-6 (+) B1: BUCKY 1 READY. *
J4-5 (-) B2: Bucky 2 ready. A contact closure from pin 5 to 6 indicates
J4-6 (+) B1: BUCKY 2 READY. *
J4-9 (-) Door interlock. A contact closure from pin 9 to 10 indicates that the
J4-10 (+) room door is closed. *
J2-1 (-) Interlock 2. A contact closure from pin 1 to 2 indicates that interlock 2
J2-2 (+) is closed. *
This is the tomo exposure input for any image receptor that is
programmed for tomo operation. The tomo start / stop command is
generated by the tomo system. The generator will only terminate the
tomo exposure if the tomo backup time is exceeded. *
J2-3 (-) Interlock 1. A contact closure from pin 3 to 4 indicates that interlock 1
J2-4 (+) is closed. *
Table 3C-1: Generator inputs

* These inputs are meant for dry contacts only. Do not apply any voltage source to these inputs.

3C.2.2 Outputs

Table 3C-2 shows the Bucky and auxiliary power outputs from the generator. Refer also to figure 3C-1.
H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD DEFINITION
J2-10 B4: Bucky 1 return.
J2-9 B6: Ground (Bucky 1).
J2-8 B8: 24 VDC, 110 / 220 VAC out (Bucky 1). See note below.
J2-7 B3: 24 VDC, 110 / 220 VAC out (Bucky 1 start). See note below.
J4-4 B4: Tomo / Bucky 2 return.
J4-3 B6: Ground (Tomo / Bucky 2).
J4-2 B8: 24 VDC, 110 / 220 VAC out (Tomo / Bucky 2). See note
below.
J4-1 B3: 24 VDC, 110 / 220 VAC out (Tomo / Bucky 2 start). See note
below.
J11-3 Room lights. The generator supplies a dry contact closure when
J11-4 the room light is to be activated.
J11-5 24 VAC @ 150 watts output for customer use.
J11-6
J11-1 (-) 24 VDC @ 45 watts output for customer use (unswitched).
J11-2 (+)

Table 3C-2: Generator outputs

NOTE: The generator is factory configured to supply 110 VAC to drive the Buckys. The Bucky outputs may be
reconfigured to supply 24 VDC or 220 VAC if required, as described in chapter 8. Please confirm
compatibility with the Buckys used in this installation before proceeding. For tomo operation, the
applicable Bucky outputs must be programmed as necessary.

Page 3C-4 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.2.2 Outputs (Cont)

IN SOME INSTALLATIONS, BUCKY START RELAYS K1 OR K3 ON THE H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD MAY
DRIVE THE INPUTS OF OPTO COUPLERS OR OTHER LOW CURRENT DEVICES ON THE BUCKY. THE
LEAKAGE CURRENT THROUGH THE R-C SNUBBER THAT IS CONNECTED ACROSS THE RELAY
CONTACTS (C3 AND R2 FOR K1, C10 AND R15 FOR K3) MAY BE SUFFICIENT TO ENERGIZE THE
BUCKY INPUTS WHEN THE RELAYS ARE OPEN.
IF THIS IS EXPERIENCED, THE SNUBBER SHOULD BE DEFEATED. REMOVING THE SERIES
RESISTOR, PART OF THE R-C SNUBBER, WILL ELIMINATE THIS PROBLEM.

Removing R2 open-circuits the snubber across the K1 contacts, removing R15 defeats the snubber
across the contacts of K3.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-5
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.2.3 Inputs & Outputs (simplified schematic)

J2
10 BUCKY RETURN ** 24 VDC
9 110 / 220 VAC
BUCKY 1
OUTPUTS 8 +12 VDC
BUCKY 1 START R2 C3
7 K1
+24 VDC BUCKY 1 START
K1 COMMAND
BUCKY 1 6
READY * 5 BUCKY 1 READY +24 VDC
INTERLOCK 1

+24 VDC
INTERLOCK 2
INTERLOCK 4
#1 * 3
INTERLOCK #2 / 2
TOMO EXPOSURE
INPUT * 1

J4
4 BUCKY RETURN ** 24 VDC
3 110 / 220 VAC
TOMO / BUCKY 2
OUTPUTS 2 +12 VDC
BUCKY 2 START R15 C10
1 K3
+24 VDC BUCKY 2 START
K3 COMMAND
BUCKY 2 6
READY * 5 BUCKY 2 READY +24 VDC
DOOR INTERLOCK

DOOR 10
INTERLOCK * 9

J11 F11
24 VAC OUT FROM 24 VAC
6
FOR COLLIMATOR SOURCE
5 +12 VDC
LAMP
3 K7
ROOM ROOM LIGHT
LIGHTS 4 “ON” COMMAND
F12
24 VDC OUT 2 + FROM 24 VDC
SOURCE
FOR TUBE
STAND LOCKS 1

* REFER TO TABLE 3C-1 FOR REQUIRED INPUT LOGIC LEVELS


** THE BUCKY OUTPUTS MAY BE CONFIGURED FOR +24 VDC, 110 VAC,
OR 220 VAC. REFER TO CHAPTER 8 FOR DETAILS.

FILE: CMP200_012B.CDR
Figure 3C-1: J2, J4, and J11 inputs and outputs (H.V. auxiliary board)

Page 3C-6 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.2.4 AEC Interconnect

Refer to chapter 3D for an overview of AEC theory, for AEC chamber connections, and for the AEC calibration
procedure.

3C.3.0 GENERATOR PROGRAMMING

If you are using a membrane console, the generator may be programmed and calibrated via the control
console or via GenWare®. When using the console for programming and calibration, all programming /
calibration menus are displayed on the LCD display window on the console. The “soft key” buttons on the
console are used to navigate through the programming screens and to select and enter values in this section.

When using the touchscreen console, the generator must be programmed and calibrated via
GenWare®. This requires the GenWare® utility software, a laptop computer (or equivalent), and a null
modem cable.

3C.3.1 Entering Into Programming Mode

To enter into the programming mode if using the membrane console, follow the steps below.

MENU

1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8

BACK FORWARD

IND100R_006A.CDR

Figure 3C-2: Programming / calibration mode reference

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-7
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.3.1 Entering Into Programming Mode (Cont)

Use these steps to access the GENERATOR SETUP menu (membrane console).
Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)
1. Start with the generator switched OFF.
2. While pressing and holding the MENU
button, press the power ON button on the
console.
3. Enter the password by pressing the button
sequence: [1] - [8] - [4] - [5].
4. The GENERATOR SETUP menu will be
displayed next.

3C.4.0 GENERATOR SETUP MENU

The GENERATOR SETUP menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* GENERATOR SETUP *
UTILITY APR EDITOR: DISABLED
GEN CONFIGURATION
DATA LINK

EXIT SETUP

Overview of the functions available within each of the options in the GENERATOR SETUP menu.
MENU SUBMENUS EQUIVALENT FUNCTION
(MEMBRANE (MEMBRANE CONSOLE) (GenWare®)
CONSOLE)
UTILITY • SET TIME & DATE • Date and Time utility.
• ERROR LOG • Error Log utility.
• STATISTICS • Generator Statistics utility.
• CONSOLE • The CONSOLE function sets console-specific
parameters; therefore, it is not available in
GenWare®.
APR EDITOR • This is a console-specific
parameter; therefore, it is
not available in GenWare®.

Page 3C-8 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.4.0 GENERATOR SETUP MENU (Cont)

MENU SUBMENUS EQUIVALENT FUNCTION


(MEMBRANE (MEMBRANE CONSOLE) (GenWare®)
CONSOLE)
GEN • TUBE SELECTION • Tube Selection utility.
CONFIGURATION
• GENERATOR LIMITS • Generator Limits utility.
• RECEPTOR SETUP • Receptor Setup utility.
• I/O CONFIGURATION • Receptor Setup utility.
• AEC SETUP • AEC Calibration utility.
• AEC CALIBRATION • AEC Calibration utility.
• TUBE CALIBRATION • Auto Tube Calibration utility.
• DAP SETUP • DAP Setup utility.
DATA LINK The DATA LINK function on the membrane console is used to communicate with an
external computer running GenWare®.
EXIT SETUP • Returns to the normal
operating mode (the non
setup / programming mode).
• Does not apply to
GenWare®.

3C.5.0 UTILITY MENU

The UTILITY menu presents the user with the options shown below.
* UTILITY *
SET TIME & DATE
ERROR LOG
STATISTICS
CONSOLE

EXIT

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-9
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.5.1 Setting Time And Date

This procedure allows the time and date to be set, or to be changed.

The SET TIME & DATE menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* SET TIME & DATE *
YEAR: 2002 HOUR: 18
MONTH: 3 MIN: 29
DAY: 30 +
-

EXIT

Figure 3C-3: GenWare® Date and Time utility

Page 3C-10 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.5.1 Setting Time And Date (Cont)

Use these steps to set the time and date.


Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)
1. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu, From the GenWare® GENERATOR
select the UTILITY menu. UTILITIES application, select Date and
Time from the Utility menu, or use the date

and time button on the GenWare®


toolbar.
2. From the UTILITY menu, select the SET The date and time may be set manually as
TIME & DATE menu. described in steps 3 to 7, or the computer
clock may be used to set the generator date
and time as described in step 8.
3. Select YEAR. Use the + or – buttons to set Select the year via the Year dialog box.
the year.
4. Select MONTH. Use the + or – buttons to Select the month via the Month dialog box.
set the month.
5. Select DAY. Use the + or – buttons to set Select the date via the Day dialog box.
the date.
6. Select HOUR. Use the + or – buttons to set Select the hour (in 24 hour format) via the
the hour (in 24 hour format). Hour dialog box.
7. Select MIN. Use the + or – buttons to set the Select the minutes via the Minute dialog
minutes. box.
8. NOTE: To synchronize GenWare® to the clock in
The time does not increment when in the your computer, check the Auto box in the
SET TIME & DATE mode. lower left corner of the Date and Time
window.
Doing so will transfer the computers time
and date settings to the time and date dialog
boxes in the upper half of the Date and
Time window. Clicking on Apply will apply
those settings to the generator’s clock.
9. Press EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-11
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.5.2 Error Log

This utility allows display of the error messages stored in the generator’s error log.

The ERROR LOG menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* ERROR LOG *
ERROR # 1 OF 18
DATE: 8-19-2002 TIME: 13:09
ERROR CODE: 200 +
ERROR MESSAGE: ANODE HEAT WARN -

KVp: 80 mA: 100 ms: 200


EXIT

Figure 3C-4: GenWare® Error Log utility

Page 3C-12 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.5.2 Error Log (Cont)

Use these steps to review the error log.


Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)
1. From the UTILITY menu, select ERROR Select Error Log from the Utility menu, or
LOG.

use the error log button on the


GenWare® toolbar.
2. Select ERROR # and use the + or - buttons Click on the < or > buttons on the Error Log
to scroll through the error log. window to scroll through the error log.
The error code, error message, date and The error code, error message, date and
time of the error will be displayed in the LCD time of the error will be displayed on the left
window, and the associated parameters will side of the Error Log window, and the
be displayed on the console displays associated parameters will be displayed
under Rad Parameters.
3. Press EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu.

3C.5.3 Statistics

This utility shows the tube exposure count and the accumulated generator exposure count. This also allows
resetting of the tube 1 exposure counter.

The STATISTICS menu for the membrane console is shown below.


* STATISTICS *
TUBE 1 EXP: 500 RESET TUBE 1 EXP

TOTAL EXP: 1100

EXIT

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-13
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.5.3 Statistics (Cont)

Figure 3C-5: GenWare® Statistics utility

Use these steps to view the generator statistics.


Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)
1. From the UTILITY menu, select Select Generator Statistics from the Utility
STATISTICS.

menu, or use the statistics button on


the GenWare® toolbar.
2. The STATISTICS menu displays exposure The Generator Statistics window displays
data, and allows the exposure counter to be exposure data, and allows the exposure
reset as described below: counter to be reset as described below:
• The TUBE 1 EXP counter displays the • The Tube 1 Rad Exposures counter
tube 1 exposure count made since this displays the tube 1 exposure count
counter was last reset. made since this counter was last reset.
• TOTAL EXP displays the total rad • Total Number of Rad Exposures
exposure count. This is not resettable * displays the total rad exposure count.
• Select RESET TUBE 1 EXP to reset the This is not resettable *.
tube 1 exposure counter. • Select Reset Tube 1 to reset the tube 1
exposure counter.

* The subject exposure counter is reset when the factory defaults are reset. Therefore, the
“total exposure” count should be recorded before resetting the factory defaults.
3. Press EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu.

Page 3C-14 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.5.4 Console

The CONSOLE CONFIG menus allow setting of specific console operating features to suit operator
preferences, and also allow resetting of the console parameters to the factory defaults.

CONSOLE CONFIG screen 1


* CONSOLE CONFIG*
SLOW KEY REPEAT: 200MS LCD SCREEN
MED. KEY REPEAT: 150MS APR MODE: NO
FAST KEY REPEAT: 75MS +
SPEAKER VOLUME: 15 -

EXIT >>

CONSOLE CONFIG screen 2


* CONSOLE CONFIG*
LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS?: NO
LOGO ON?: NO
LANGUAGE: ENGLISH
CM THICKNESS ON?: NO
PASSWORD

EXIT

Since the CONSOLE CONFIG setup affects the console only (setting of specific console operating features to
suit operator preferences), no equivalent function is available in GenWare®.

Definition of console parameters as used in this section.


FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
(MEMBRANE
CONSOLE)
SLOW KEY Determines the speed at which displays change while the selected key is
REPEAT pressed for the first 5 counts.
MED. KEY Determines the speed at which displays change while the selected key is
REPEAT pressed for the next 5 counts.
FAST KEY Determines the speed at which displays change while the selected key is
REPEAT pressed after 10 counts.
SPEAKER Sets the speaker volume for the control console in the range 1 to 15.
VOLUME
LCD SCREEN Toggles between normal and reverse video for the LCD display.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-15
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.5.4 Console (Cont)

FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
(MEMBRANE
CONSOLE)
APR MODE NO allows the operator to select an APR view, and still have the ability to
manually select receptors, focus, technique, film screen, AEC fields, etc.
YES allows the operator to select all of the above EXCEPT the technique
selection (AEC, mAs, mA/ms) i.e. this disables the ability to select AEC, mAs,
mA/ms in APR mode.
AEC, mAs, mA/ms changes can only be made by selecting an APR technique
that has been programmed to the desired technique.
LOAD CONSOLE YES: Initializes the console CPU’s NVRAM to the factory default settings when
DEFAULTS? the generator is switched ON. This restores the factory defaults for the APR and
the CONSOLE settings.
NO: The NVRAM is not reset when the generator is switched on.
The normal setting for this function is NO. Do not set to YES unless you
intend to restore the console factory defaults. Doing so will cause all
custom console and APR settings to be lost.
LOGO ON? YES: The predefined logo is displayed briefly after the generator is switched on.
NO: The logo is not displayed.
LANGUAGE Selects the language for status and error messages (the APR text must be
changed via the CPI GenWare® utility software).
CM THICKNESS YES: CM THICKNESS mode is enabled.
ON? NO: CM THICKNESS mode is disabled.
If CM THICKNESS is enabled, the AEC BACKUP mode (under RECEPTOR
SETUP) must be set to mAs for each image receptor. If this is not done, CM
thickness will not be available in AEC mode.
PASSWORD Allows the Programming Mode password to be changed

This function does not apply to GenWare®.


Use these steps to set the console parameters. Refer to the definitions in the previous table.
Step Action (membrane console)
1. From the UTILITY menu select CONSOLE. This accesses CONSOLE CONFIG screen 1.
2. Select SLOW KEY REPEAT. Use the + or – buttons to set the “slow key repeat” time.
3. Select MED. KEY REPEAT. Use the + or – buttons to set the “med. key repeat” time.
4. Select FAST KEY REPEAT. Use the + or – buttons to set the “fast key repeat” time.
5. Select SPEAKER VOLUME. Use the + or – buttons to set the speaker loudness.
6. Select LCD SCREEN. Toggle the button to select normal or reverse video.
7. Select APR MODE. Toggle the button to select YES or NO.

Page 3C-16 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.5.4 Console (Cont)

Step Action (membrane console)


8. Press >>.
9. Do not perform this step unless you intend to restore the console factory defaults.
To restore the console factory default settings, select LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS? and
then toggle the adjacent selection button to select YES.
In order for the changes to take effect, the generator must be switched OFF and then ON
again. The console will prompt for a YES or NO to loading defaults when it is powered on
again. Select YES to both prompts to reset the console and APR defaults. Selecting NO will
not update the defaults.
The LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS setting automatically resets to NO the next time the
generator is switched on.
10. Select LOGO ON?. Toggle the button to select YES or NO.
11. Select LANGUAGE. Toggle the button to select the desired language for status and error
messages.
12. Select CM THICKNESS ON?. Toggle the button to select YES or NO.
13. Select PASSWORD. Enter and re-enter a new password as prompted.
14. Select EXIT to return to CONSOLE CONFIG screen 1.
15. Select EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu.
16. Select EXIT again to return to the GENERATOR SETUP menu.

3C.6.0 APR EDITOR

The APR EDITOR enables / disables the ability of the operator to make and then save changes to APR
techniques.
* GENERATOR SETUP *
UTILITY APR EDITOR: DISABLED
GEN CONFIGURATION
DATA LINK

EXIT SETUP

No equivalent function exists in GenWare®, as the APR EDITOR affects the console operation only.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-17
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.6.0 APR EDITOR (Cont)

Definition of the APR EDITOR function.


FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
(MEMBRANE
CONSOLE)
APR EDITOR Enables / disables the ability of the operator to make and then save changes to
APR techniques..
ENABLED: Allows the operator to change the default APR technique(s),
and then save the changes to memory. The APR will
subsequently default to the changed technique.
DISABLED: Allows temporary editing of APR technique(s), but does not
allow the changes to be saved to memory. The APR will
always default to the original technique when the generator is
switched OFF and then ON again.

The generator stores the last APR EDITOR setting before being
switched off. If the APR editor was previously ENABLED, APR changes
may subsequently be made and then saved in normal operating mode
without the need to manually set the APR editor to ENABLED. To
disable APR technique changes, the APR editor must be set to
DISABLED.

NOTE: APR text may be altered by using a computer running GenWare®. Further documentation
regarding this function is included with GenWare® in the form of an MS Word document.

This function does not apply to GenWare®.


Use these steps to set the APR EDITOR. Refer to the definition in the previous table.
Step Action (membrane console)
1. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu, select APR EDITOR.
2. Toggle the button to select ENABLED or DISABLED.

Page 3C-18 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.7.0 GENERATOR CONFIGURATION

The GEN CONFIGURATION menu presents the user with the selections shown below. These are described
in detail in this section.
* GEN CONFIGURATION *
TUBE SELECTION AEC SETUP
GENERATOR LIMITS AEC CALIBRATION
RECEPTOR SETUP TUBE CALIBRATION
I/O CONFIGURATION DAP SETUP

EXIT

3C.7.1 Tube Selection

The TUBE SELECTION function allows the desired tube type to be selected, and allows setting of the default
limits for that tube.
The first screen of the TUBE SELECTION menus for the membrane console is shown below. This is followed
by additional tube selection menus, with additional tube types. The number of tube selection menus, and the
actual tube selections, may not be exactly as shown.

TUBE SELECTION screen 1


* TUBE 1 SELECTION *
A192B 0.6/1.2 G256 0.6/1.0
A256 0.6/1.0 G292 0.6/1.2
A292 0.6/1.2 G1082 0.3/1.0
A272 0.3/0.6 RAD8 1.0/2.0

EXIT >>

TUBE SELECTION screen 2


* TUBE 1 SELECTION *
RAD14 0.6/1.2 RAD74 0.6/1.5
RAD21 0.6/1.2 RAD92 0.6/1.2
RAD56 0.6/1.2 DX10HS 0.6/1.0
RAD60 0.6/1.2 DX92HS 0.6/1.2

<< >>

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-19
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.7.1 Tube Selection (cont)

TUBE SELECTION screen 3


* TUBE 1 SELECTION *
DX93HS 0.6/1.5 RO1750 0.6/1.3
DX101HS 0.6/1.3
MX75 1.0/2.0
MX100 0.6/1.25

<< >>

The following menu is only available if additional tubes have been downloaded via a computer
running GenWare®.

TUBE SELECTION screen 4


* TUBE 1 SELECTION *

IF ADDITIONAL TUBES HAVE BEEN DOWNLOADED FROM GenWare®


THEY WILL BE DISPLAYED ON THIS SCREEN

<< RETURN

The next three menus show the default tube limits. These menus appear after a
tube has been selected in the previous steps.
TUBE DEFAULTS screen 1
*TUBE 1: RAD60 0.6/1.2 12º REV 1.4*
TUBE SPEED: LOW
MAX SF KW LS: 21.3
MAX LF KW LS: 58.9 +
MAX KV: 125 -

EXIT >>

Page 3C-20 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.7.1 Tube Selection (cont)

TUBE DEFAULTS screen 2


*TUBE 1: RAD60 0.6/1.2 12º REV 1.4*
SF STANDBY: 2.5A FIL BOOST: 200MS
LF STANDBY: 2.5A FIL PREHEAT: 800MS
SF MAX: 5.2A +
LF MAX: 5.5A -

<< >>

TUBE DEFAULTS screen 3


*TUBE 1: RAD60 0.6/1.2 12º REV 1.4*
MAX SF MA: 320
ANODE HU WARNING: 80%
ANODE HU LIMIT: 90% +
-

<< RETURN

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-21
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.7.1 Tube Selection (cont)

Figure 3C-6: GenWare® Tube Selection window, Tube Library tab

Figure 3C-7: GenWare® Tube Selection window, Tube Settings tab

Page 3C-22 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.7.1 Tube Selection (cont)

Figure 3C-8: GenWare® Tube Selection window, kW Ratings at 100ms tab

Figure 3C-9: GenWare® Tube Selection window, Filament Parameters tab

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-23
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.7.1 Tube Selection (cont)

Figure 3C-10: GenWare® Tube Selection window, Anode Heating tab

Definitions of TUBE SELECTION menu items.


FUNCTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
(MEMBRANE (GenWare®)
CONSOLE)
TUBE SPEED Tube Speed This selection is permanently set to low speed.

MAX SF KW LS Low Speed: Max Sets the maximum small focus low speed kW limit (@ 100
SF Power (kW) ms *).
MAX LF KW LS Low Speed: Max Sets the maximum large focus low speed kW limit (@ 100
LF Power (kW) ms *).
MAX KV Max. Tube Sets the maximum kV allowed.
Voltage (kV)
SF STANDBY Small Focus: Sets the small focus standby filament current. The
Standby Current required value should be obtained from the X-ray tube
(A) data sheets.
LF STANDBY Large Focus: As above but for large focus.
Standby Current
(A)
SF MAX Small Focus: Max Sets the small focus maximum filament current.
Current (A)
LF MAX Large Focus: Max As above but for large focus.
Current (A)

Page 3C-24 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.5.1 Tube Selection (Cont)

FUNCTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION


(MEMBRANE (GenWare®)
CONSOLE)
FIL BOOST Filament Boost Sets the filament rapid boost duration in order to quickly
Time (ms) raise the filament temperature.
FIL PREHEAT Filament Preheat The time that the filament is held at the required emission
Time (ms) level before an exposure is permitted.
MAX SF MA Max. SF Current Sets the maximum mA in small focus. This should be set
(mA) as low as possible to prevent focal spot track wear and
focal spot blooming.
ANODE HU Anode Warning Sets the limit at which the anode heat-warning message is
WARNING (%) displayed.
ANODE HU LIMIT Anode Limit (%) Sets the limit at which exposures will be inhibited. If the
anode heating is currently under the limit, the next
exposure will be inhibited if the generator calculates that
the exposure will exceed the anode HU limit.

* The stated maximum kW limits apply at the 100 ms point on the X-ray tube load ratings curve. Increasing or
decreasing the kW limits will shift the entire curve up or down proportionately to the percentage kW change.

Use these steps to select the desired tube type.


Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)
1. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu, Select Tube Selection from the Setup
select GEN CONFIGURATION.

menu, or use the tube setup button


on the GenWare® toolbar.
2. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, Select the Tube Library tab.
select TUBE SELECTION.
Choose the desired tube type by pressing Choose the desired tube type from the tube
the button adjacent to the desired selection. library.
Use the >> and << buttons to navigate Press Download to download the selected
through the tube selection menus if the tube to the generator.
desired tube is not displayed on the current
screen.
Additional tube types may be downloaded
using the console utility in GenWare®.
3. Once the desired tube has been selected,
parameters for that tube are displayed
showing the default values. DO NOT adjust
the default values at this time.
PLEASE ENSURE THAT THE SELECTED X-RAY TUBE STATOR IS
COMPATIBLE WITH THE STARTER IN YOUR GENERATOR.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-25
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.5.1 Tube Selection (Cont)

When the desired tube is selected, the default limits are displayed (membrane console). Please consult the X-
ray tube data sheet(s) before making any changes.

The low speed starter operates at 50 Hz for 50 Hz mains, or 60 Hz for 60 Hz mains. Therefore, the 60 Hz tube
ratings are automatically derated for 50 Hz operation, if required.

PLEASE DO NOT CHANGE ANY DEFAULTS UNLESS THE IMPACT OF THOSE CHANGES IS CLEARLY
UNDERSTOOD. INITIAL CALIBRATION SHOULD BE PERFORMED USING THE DEFAULT VALUES.

NOTE: BEFORE CHANGING X-RAY TUBE DEFAULT PARAMETERS, PLEASE FILL IN THE X-RAY
TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET, TABLE 3C-3. A BLANK FORM THAT
SHOULD BE PHOTOCOPIED IS LOCATED AT THE END OF THIS SECTION. THIS ALLOWS
RECORDING OF THE DEFAULT VALUES AND THE NEW (CHANGED) VALUES.

Use these steps to set the tube limits and the associated parameters. Refer to the definitions in the previous
table.
Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)
1. Select the kW Ratings at 100 ms tab.
2. Select MAX SF KW LS. Use the + or – Set the low speed, small focus kW limit via
buttons to set the low speed, small focus kW the Max SF Power (kW) dialog box, under
limit. Low Speed.
3. Select MAX LF KW LS. Use the + or – Set the low speed, large focus kW limit via
buttons to set the low speed, large focus kW the Max LF Power (kW) dialog box, under
limit. Low Speed.
4. Select the Tube Settings tab.
5. Select MAX KV. Use the + or – buttons to Set the maximum allowable kV via the Max.
set the maximum allowable kV. Tube Voltage (kV) dialog box.
6. Press >>. Select the Filament Parameters tab.
7. Select SF STANDBY. Use the + or – Set the small focus filament standby current
buttons to set the small focus filament via the Standby Current (A) dialog box,
standby current. under Small Focus.
8. Select LF STANDBY. Use the + or – buttons Set the large focus filament standby current
to set the large focus filament standby via the Standby Current (A) dialog box,
current. under Large Focus.
9. Select SF MAX. Use the + or – buttons to Set the small focus maximum filament
set the small focus maximum filament current via the Max Current (A) dialog box,
current. under Small Focus.
10. Select LF MAX. Use the + or – buttons to Set the large focus maximum filament
set the large focus maximum filament current via the Max Current (A) dialog box,
current. under Large Focus.

Page 3C-26 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.5.1 Tube Selection (Cont)

Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)


11. Select FIL BOOST. Use the + or – buttons Set the filament rapid boost duration via the
to set the filament rapid boost duration. Filament Boost Time (ms) dialog box.
12. Select FIL PREHEAT. Use the + or – Set the filament preheat time via the
buttons to set the filament preheat time. Filament Preheat Time (ms) dialog box.
13. Press >>. Select the Tube Settings tab.
14. Select MAX SF MA. Use the + or – buttons Set the maximum small focus mA via the
to set the maximum small focus mA. Max. SF Current (mA) dialog box.
15. Select the Anode Heating tab.
16. Select ANODE HU WARNING. Use the + or Set the desired anode HU warning % via the
– buttons to set desired anode HU warning Anode Warning (%) dialog box.
%.
17. Select ANODE HU LIMIT. Use the + or – Set the desired anode HU limit % via the
buttons to set desired anode HU limit %. Anode Limit (%) dialog box.
18. Press << and EXIT as required to return to
the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.

Typically, the boost time should be between 200 and 250 msec, and the preheat time should be in the range of
700 - 800 ms.
If in doubt, monitor the filament feedback and be sure that there is no change in the signal level 5 ms. after the
start of an exposure, and that the mA starts at the selected level.

Standby current must be below the emission point.

If the maximum filament current is increased, be careful not to exceed the tube manufacturer’s
specifications.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-27
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.5.1 Tube Selection (Cont)

TUBE SELECTION TUBE 1


DEFAULT SELECTED
TUBE SELECTED
TUBE SPEED
MAX SF KW LS
MAX LF KW LS
MAX KV
SF STANDBY
LF STANDBY
SF MAX
LF MAX
FIL BOOST
FIL PREHEAT
MAX SF MA
ANODE HU WARNING
ANODE HU LIMIT

GENERATOR LIMITS DEFAULT SELECTED


MAX KW
MAX MA
MIN MA
MAX MAS
ROTOR BOOST

Table 3C-3: X-ray tube and generator parameter worksheet

3C.7.2 Generator Limits

The GENERATOR LIMITS function allows setting of the generator output limits defined below.

The GENERATOR LIMITS menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* GENERATOR LIMITS*
MAX KW: 32 ROTOR BOOST: 1800 MS
MAX MA: 320
MIN MA: 10 +
MAX MAS 500 -

EXIT

Page 3C-28 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.7.2 Generator Limits (Cont)

Figure 3E-11: GenWare® Generator Limits window

Definitions of GENERATOR LIMITS menu items.


FUNCTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
(MEMBRANE (GenWare®)
CONSOLE)
MAX KW Max. Generator Sets the maximum generator kW limit.
Power (kW)
MAX MA Max. Generator Sets the maximum generator mA limit.
Current (mA)
MIN MA Min. Generator Sets the minimum generator mA limit.
Current (mA)
MAX MAS Max. Generator Sets the maximum generator mAs limit.
Current-Time
(mAs)
ROTOR BOOST This function is Sets the low speed starter boost time, in milliseconds. The
not available in range is 1000 ms (1 sec) to 4000 ms (4 sec), adjustable in
GenWare® 100 millisecond increments.

BEFORE MAKING ANY CHANGES IN THIS SECTION, CONSULT THE X-RAY TUBE DATA SHEETS TO
ENSURE THAT THE PROPOSED CHANGES DO NOT EXCEED THE MANUFACTURERS
RECOMMENDED LIMITS. THE ORIGINAL GENERATOR LIMITS SHOULD BE RECORDED IN A COPY OF
TABLE 3C-3 BEFORE CONTINUING.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-29
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.7.2 Generator Limits (Cont)

Use these steps to set the generator limits. Refer to the definitions in the previous table.
Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)
1. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, Select Generator Limits from the Setup
select GENERATOR LIMITS. menu, or use the generator limits button

on the GenWare® toolbar.


2. Select MAX KW. Use the + or – buttons to Set the maximum kW via the Max.
set the maximum kW. Generator Power (kW) dialog box.
3. Select MAX MA. Use the + or – buttons to Set the maximum mA via the Max.
set the maximum mA. Generator Current (mA) dialog box.
4. Select MIN MA. Use the + or – buttons to Set the minimum mA via the Min. Generator
set the minimum mA. Current (mA) dialog box.
5. Select MAX MAS. Use the + or – buttons to Set the maximum mAs via the Max.
set the maximum mAs. Generator Current-Time (mAs) dialog box.
6. Select ROTOR BOOST. Use the + or – This function is not available in GenWare®
buttons to set the low speed starter boost
time.
7. Press EXIT to return to the GEN
CONFIGURATION menu.

Page 3C-30 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.7.3 Receptor Setup

The RECEPTOR SETUP function allows each of the image receptors to be programmed as defined in the
table following the example menu screens.

The RECEPTOR SETUP menus for the membrane console are shown below.

MENU 1
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym] *
TUBE: 1 TOMO BUT: 2500 MS
RECEPTOR SYM: [sym]
MEMORY: DEF +
TOMO: NO -

EXIT >>

MENU 2
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym]*
SF/LF SWITCH: MAN DEFAULTS
AEC BACKUP: FIXED AEC CHANNEL: 1
AEC BACKUP MAS: 100 +
AEC BACKUP MS: 1000 -

<<

NOTE: THE DEFAULTS SELECTION IN MENU 2 IS ONLY AVAILABLE IF MEMORY IN MENU 1 WAS SET
TO DEF.
RECEPTOR MENUS 3 AND 4 (FOLLOWING) ARE ONLY ACCESSIBLE IF DEFAULTS IS
ENABLED.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-31
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.7.3 Receptor Setup (Cont)

MENU 3
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym] DEFAULTS*
TECHNIQUE: AEC LEFT FIELD: YES
FOCUS: SMALL CENTER FIELD: YES
FILM SCREEN: 1 RIGHT FIELD: YES

<< >>

MENU 4
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym] DEFAULTS*
KV: 75 DENSITY: 0
MA: 320
MS: 50 +
-

<<

Page 3C-32 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.7.3 Receptor Setup (Cont)

Figure 3C-12: GenWare® Receptor Setup window, Receptor Properties tab

Figure 3C-13: GenWare® Receptor Setup window, AEC tab

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-33
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.7.3 Receptor Setup (Cont)

Figure 3C-14: GenWare® Receptor Setup window, Receptor Defaults tab

Definitions of RECEPTOR SETUP menu items.


FUNCTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
(MEMBRANE (GenWare®)
CONSOLE)
TUBE Receptor Enable This function allows the receptor to be disabled.
checkbox Membrane console:
NONE: Disables the currently selected receptor.
1: Enables the currently selected receptor.

GenWare®:
Receptor Enables / disables the currently
Enable selected receptor.
RECEPTOR SYM This is a console Allows one of the predefined receptor symbols [sym] to be
function only; assigned to the selected receptor.
does not apply to
Genware.

Page 3C-34 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.5.3 Receptor Setup (Cont)

FUNCTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION


(MEMBRANE (GenWare®)
CONSOLE)
MEMORY Memory Defines the techniques that will be defaulted to when a
receptor is selected.
YES / on: The selected receptor will remember it’s
last techniques such that those
techniques are displayed when that
receptor is re-selected.
NO / off: The selected receptor will not remember
the last techniques used on that
receptor. The techniques used will be
the same as last used on the previous
receptor.
DEF / The techniques used for that receptor
default: will be as programmed. See receptor
setup menus 3 and 4 (membrane
console) or the Receptor Defaults tab
(GenWare®).
TOMO Tomo Enables or disables tomographic operation.
TOMO BUT Tomo Back-Up Time Sets the tomo backup time.
(ms)
SF/LF SWITCH This function is not Enables or disables the ability of the generator to
available in automatically select the large or small focus.
GenWare® AUTO: Small or large focus will automatically be
selected by the generator. The small to
large (and vice-versa) switching will
occur at the MAX SF MA set point.
MAN: The operator must manually select small
or large focus.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-35
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.5.3 Receptor Setup (Cont)

FUNCTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION


(MEMBRANE (GenWare®)
CONSOLE)
AEC BACKUP AEC Mode Defines the AEC backup mode to be used:
FIXED: The generator will determine the
maximum AEC backup time, not to
exceed preset AEC backup mAs/ms
values or system limits. Density (DENS)
only will be displayed at the lower right
side of the LCD display during AEC
operation.
MAS: Allows the operator to adjust the AEC
backup mAs, not to exceed preset AEC
backup mAs/ms values or system limits.
DENS and the backup mAs will be
displayed at the lower right side of the
LCD display during AEC operation.
mAs mode operation must be set in order
to use CM thickness mode in AEC.
MS: Allows the operator to adjust the AEC
backup ms, not to exceed preset AEC
backup mAs/ms values or system limits.
DENS and the backup ms will be
displayed at the lower right side of the
LCD display during AEC operation.
AEC BACKUP AEC Back-Up mAs Sets the maximum AEC backup mAs.
MAS
AEC BACKUP MS AEC Back-Up ms Sets the maximum AEC back-up ms.
DEFAULTS Receptor Defaults This selection is available only if MEMORY was set to
DEF in RECEPTOR SETUP menu 1 (membrane
console), or if Memory was set to default under
Receptor Properties in GenWare®.
The DEFAULTS menus allow the default receptor
techniques to be programmed.
AEC CHANNEL AEC Channel Defines which AEC channel will be used by the selected
receptor. This must be set to a valid AEC input channel
number, or to 0 / OFF as described below.
Select 0 (membrane console) or OFF (GenWare®) to
disable AEC operation on the selected receptor. If the
AEC input is not disabled when required, an error
message will be presented. For example, if using an
AEC board with only 3 input channels, an error will be
displayed when selecting the fourth channel.

Page 3C-36 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.5.3 Receptor Setup (Cont)

FUNCTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION


(MEMBRANE (GenWare®)
CONSOLE)
THE FOLLOWING SELECTIONS ARE ONLY AVAILABLE IF DEFAULTS WAS ENABLED AS
PREVIOUSLY DESCRIBED.
TECHNIQUE Technique Defines which technique will be defaulted to when a
receptor is selected.
Membrane console:
MA: Defaults to mA/ms mode.
MAS: Defaults to mAs mode.
AEC Defaults to AEC mode.

GenWare®:
ms: Defaults to mA/ms mode.
mAs: Defaults to mAs mode.
AEC Defaults to AEC mode.
FOCUS Focus Defines which focus will be defaulted to when a receptor
is selected. Options are SMALL or LARGE.
FILM SCREEN Film Screen Defines which film screen will be defaulted to when a
receptor is selected and AEC enabled. Options are film
screen 1, 2, or 3 (membrane console) or I, II, or III
GenWare®.
LEFT FIELD Fields Defines which field(s) will be defaulted to when a
receptor is selected.
CENTER FIELD
Membrane console:
RIGHT FIELD
YES: The selected field will be selected.
NO: The selected field will not be selected.

GenWare®:
Refer to the graphic under Fields:
A black field select rectangle = field not selected, a
green field select rectangle = field selected.
KV Voltage (kV) Selects the default kV.
MA Current (mA) Selects the default mA.
MS Time (ms) Selects the default ms.
DENSITY Density Selects the default density.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-37
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.5.3 Receptor Setup (Cont)

If the image receptor defaults are changed, please record the original defaults in a copy of the
following table:

IMAGE RECEPTOR DEFAULT SETTINGS


FUNCTION RECEPTO RECEPTO RECEPTO RECEPTO RECEPTO RECEPTO
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
TECHNIQUE
FOCUS
FILM
SCREEN
LEFT FIELD
CENTER
FIELD
RIGHT
FIELD
KV
MA
MS
DENSITY

Page 3C-38 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.5.3 Receptor Setup (Cont)

NOTE: DO NOT SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR WHILE IN *RECEPTOR SETUP DEFAULTS*
MENUS 3 AND 4. DOING SO WILL CAUSE THE UPDATED RECEPTOR SETUP PARAMETERS
NOT TO BE SAVED. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE FIRST RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING BE
COMPLETED, THE RECEPTOR SETUP MENUS BE EXITED TO THE GEN CONFIGURATION
MENU, THEN THE RECEPTOR SETUP MENU BE RESELECTED TO PROGRAM THE NEXT
RECEPTOR. THE ABOVE SHOULD BE REPEATED UNTIL ALL RECEPTORS ARE
PROGRAMMED. THIS WILL ENSURE THAT THE UPDATED PARAMETERS ARE SAVED.

Use these steps to set up the receptor parameters. Refer to the definitions in the previous table.

Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)


1. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, Select Receptor Setup from the Setup
select RECEPTOR SETUP. menu, or use the receptor setup button

on the GenWare® toolbar.


2. Select the Receptor Properties tab.
3. Select the first receptor to be programmed. Select the first receptor to be programmed.
4. Select TUBE. Toggle the button to select Check the Receptor Enable checkbox to
NONE or 1. enable the selected receptor.
5. Select RECEPTOR SYM. Use the + or –
buttons to select the desired receptor
symbol.
6. Select MEMORY. Toggle the button to Under Memory, select off, on, or default.
select NO, YES, or DEF.
7. Select TOMO. Toggle the button to select Check the Tomo checkbox to enable
YES or NO. tomographic operation.
8. Select TOMO BUT. Use the + or – buttons Select the desired tomo backup time via the
to select the desired tomo backup time. Tomo Back-Up Time (ms) dialog box.
9. Press >>.
10. Select SF/LF SWITCH. Toggle the button to This function is not available in GenWare®
select AUTO or MAN.
11. Select the AEC tab.
12. Select AEC BACKUP. Toggle the button to Under AEC Mode, select fixed, mAs, or
select FIXED, MAS, or MS. ms.
13. Select AEC BACKUP MAS. Use the + or – Select the maximum backup mAs via the
buttons to select the maximum backup mAs. AEC Back-Up mAs dialog box.
14. Select AEC BACKUP MS. Use the + or – Select the maximum backup ms via the AEC
buttons to select the maximum backup ms. Back-Up ms dialog box.
15. Select AEC CHANNEL. Use the + or – Select the AEC channel to be assigned to
buttons to assign the desired AEC channel the selected receptor, or disable AEC
to the selected receptor, or to disable AEC operation on that receptor via the AEC
operation on that receptor. Channel dialog box.
The following steps only apply if MEMORY in step 6 was set to DEF / default.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-39
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.5.3 Receptor Setup (Cont)

Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)


16. Select DEFAULTS. Select the Receptor Defaults tab.
17. Select TECHNIQUE. Toggle the button to Under Technique, select ms, mAs, or AEC.
select MA, MAS, or AEC.
18. Select FOCUS. Toggle the button to select Under Focus, select small or large.
SMALL or LARGE.
19. Select FILM SCREEN. Toggle the button to Under Film Screen, select I, II, or III.
select 1, 2, or 3.
20. Select LEFT FIELD. Toggle the button to Click the left field on the graphic under
select YES or NO. Fields to select / deselect that field. Black
indicates that the field is not selected; green
indicates that the field is selected.
21. Repeat the previous step for the CENTER Repeat the previous step for the center and
and RIGHT fields. right fields.
22. Press >>.
23. Select KV, MA, MS, and DENSITY. Use the Select the default kV, mA, ms, and density
+ or – buttons to select the default kV, mA, via the Voltage (kV), Current (mA), Time
ms, and density, respectively. (ms), and Density dialog boxes,
respectively.
24. Press << and EXIT as required to the GEN
CONFIGURATION menu.
25. Repeat steps 3 to 22 for the remaining
receptors. It is necessary to return to the
GEN CONFIGURATION menu after
programming each receptor to ensure that
the updated parameters are saved to
memory.

Page 3C-40 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.7.4 I/O Configuration

The I/O CONFIGURATION function allows programming the states of the exposure for the inputs and the
outputs on the room interface board.
The I/O CONFIGURATION menus for the membrane console are shown below.
* INPUTS [sym] *
TUBE THERMAL SW. ____ STANDBY STATE
DOOR ITLK: ____

EXIT >>

* INPUTS [sym] *
INTERLOCK 1: ____ STANDBY STATE
INTERLOCK 2: ____
BUCKY 1 RDY: ____
BUCKY 2 RDY: ____

<< ⇑ >>

* OUTPUTS [sym] *
BUCKY 1 START: ____ STANDBY STATE
BUCKY 2 START: ____
ROOM LIGHT: ____

<< ⇑ >>

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-41
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.7.4 I/O Configuration (cont)

Figure 3C-15: GenWare® Receptor Setup window, Inputs tab

Figure 3C-16: GenWare® Receptor Setup window, Outputs tab

Page 3C-42 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.7.4 I/O Configuration (cont)

Definitions of I/O CONFIGURATION menu items.


FUNCTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
(MEMBRANE (GenWare®)
CONSOLE)
TUBE THERMAL Tube Thermal Programs the thermal switch input at J7-1 and J7-2 on the
SW Switch H.V. auxiliary board.
DOOR ITLK Room Door Programs the door interlock input at J4-9 and J4-10 on the
Interlock H.V. auxiliary board.
INTERLOCK 1 Interlock 1 Programs the interlock #1 input at J2-3 and J2-4 on the
H.V. auxiliary board.
INTERLOCK 2 Interlock 2 Programs the interlock #2 input at J2-1 and J2-2 on the
H.V. auxiliary board. This is the tomo exposure input for
any receptor that is assigned to tomo operation.
BUCKY 1 RDY Bucky 1 Ready Programs the Bucky 1 input at J2-5 and J2-6 on the H.V.
auxiliary board.
BUCKY 2 RDY Bucky 2 Ready Programs the Bucky 2 input at J4-5 and J4-6 on the H.V.
auxiliary board.
BKY 1 START Bucky 1 Start Programs the Bucky 1 “start” output at J2-7 on the H.V.
auxiliary board.
BKY 2 START Bucky 2 Start Programs the Bucky 2 “start” output at J4-1 on the H.V.
auxiliary board. This is normally programmed as the tomo
output.
ROOM LIGHT Room Light Programs the room light output at J11-3 and J11-4 on the
H.V. auxiliary board.

The inputs and outputs defined in the previous table are programmable as follows:
• Inputs may be programmed such that the selected input is active or inactive during various states of the
generator. Inactive inputs are ignored; unused inputs should normally be programmed to be inactive.
• Outputs may be programmed such that the relay connected to the selected output is energized or de-
energized during various states of the generator. Unused outputs should normally be programmed to be
de-energized.
• The inputs and outputs must be programmed separately for each receptor. Each receptor may have its
own unique programming.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-43
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.5.4 I/O Configuration (Cont)

MEMBRANE CONSOLE
The STATE button on the upper right hand side of the menu selects the current state. The word STATE is
preceded by the description of the state: for example, STANDBY.
The arrow in the lower middle area points to the current level for the selected state. Moving to the next
state is accomplished by pressing the STATE button. The states are as follows:

• STANDBY Sets the state of the I/O when the generator is in standby or idle
mode.
• PREP Sets the state of the I/O when the generator enters PREP
mode.
• GEN RDY Sets the state of the I/O when the generator has completed
PREP mode and is ready to expose.
• RAD EXP Sets the state of the I/O when the generator starts a
radiographic exposure.

Pressing the button next to the selected input or output on the left of the display selects that function. The level
of the selected state is changed by pressing the selection button again (low = off / inactive, high = on / active).
For inputs, setting the level “low” means that the input is ignored during that state. Setting the level
“high” requires that the corresponding input is satisfied before the generator will advance to that state. For
example, if the door interlock (DOOR ITLK) is set to logic “low” for all states, then an X-ray exposure may be
made without a door interlock closure.
Setting an output level “low” causes the relay associated with that output to be de-energized during
the selected state. Setting the level “high” will cause the associated relay to be energized during the selected
state. For example, the Bucky 1 “start” output will be disabled if BKY 1 START is set to “low” for all states.

The example below shows a TYPICAL input configuration.

1 2 3 4
TUBE THERMAL SW.
1 = STANDBY STATE (shown low/inactive)
2 = PREP STATE (shown high/active)
3 = GEN RDY STATE (shown high/active)
4 = RAD EXP STATE (shown high/active)
CMP200_I-O.CDR

Figure 3C-17: Example of input states

Page 3C-44 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.5.4 I/O Configuration (Cont)

GenWare®
On the Inputs and Outputs tabs, the generator states are shown above the vertical grey / red bars. For
inputs, grey indicates states where the input cannot be programmed. Only states that are shown in red can be
changed. Outputs are programmable for each of the four generator states.

The logic level of the selected state is changed by clicking in the desired state column, to the right of the
selected input or output (unchecked = off / inactive, checked = on / active).
For inputs, an unchecked state means that the input is ignored during that state. A checked state
(marked with an X) requires that the corresponding input be satisfied before the generator will advance to that
state.
For outputs, an unchecked state causes the relay associated with that output to be de-energized
during the selected state. A checked state (marked with an X) will cause the associated relay to be energized
during the selected state.

Use these steps for programming the I/O functions. Refer to the definitions in the previous table.

Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)


1. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, From the Receptor Setup window, select
select I/O CONFIGURATION. the Inputs tab.
2. Select the first receptor to be programmed. Select the first receptor to be programmed.
Use the Receptor tabs on the Receptor
Setup window.
3. Press the STATE button to select the first For the Tube Thermal Switch input, identify
state that can be programmed for the TUBE the first state that can be programmed. This
THERMAL SW. input. This is the STANDBY is the Standby state.
state. Enable or disable the Tube Thermal Switch
Toggle the TUBE THERMAL SW. button to input during the standby state by checking
select the desired logic level (low or high) to (with an X), or unchecking the Standby
disable or enable that input during the column to the right of Tube Thermal
standby state. Switch.
4. Repeat the previous step for each state. Repeat the previous step for each state.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each input. Use Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each input.
the >> button to advance to INPUTS menu
2.
6. Press >> to select the OUTPUTS menu. Select the Outputs tab.
7. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to program each Repeat steps 3 and 4 to program each
output. output.
An unchecked state causes the relay
connected to that output to be de-energized
during the selected state. A checked state
(with an X) will result in the relay being
energized during the selected state.
8. When finished the I/O programming for the Select Apply to save the programming for
current receptor, exit to the GEN the current receptor.
CONFIGURATION menu.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-45
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.5.4 I/O Configuration (Cont)

Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)


9. Reselect I/O CONFIGURATION, and then Select the next receptor to be programmed.
select the next receptor to be programmed. Use the Receptor tabs on the Receptor
Setup window.
10. Program all inputs and outputs for the selected receptor.
11. When finished programming all receptors,
exit to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.

The input and output programming should be recorded in a copy of the table below. This will provide a record
of the I/O configuration for future reference.

FUNCTIONS STANDBY PREP GEN RDY RAD EXP

INPUTS

TUBE THERMAL SW.

DOOR ITLK.

INTERLOCK 1

INTERLOCK 2

BUCKY 1 RDY

BUCKY 2 RDY

OUTPUTS

BKY 1 START

BKY 2 START

ROOM LIGHT

Page 3C-46 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.7.5 AEC Setup

The AEC SETUP menus allow programming of AEC parameters for each AEC channel.

The AEC SETUP menus for the membrane console are shown below.

MENU 1
* AEC SETUP*
CHANNEL: 1 CHAMBER TYPE: ION
LEFT FIELD: YES FILM SCREEN 1 : YES
CENTER FIELD: YES FILM SCREEN 2 : YES
RIGHT FIELD: YES FILM SCREEN 3 : YES

EXIT >>

MENU 2. Do not adjust these values at this time.


* AEC SETUP*
R FIELD COMP: 0
C FIELD COMP: 0
L FIELD COMP: 0 +
-

<<

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-47
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.7.5 AEC Setup (Cont)

Figure 3C-18: GenWare® AEC Setup & Calibration window, AEC Setup tab

Figure 3C-19: GenWare® AEC Setup & Calibration window, Film Screen Options tab

Page 3C-48 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.7.5 AEC Setup (Cont)

Note the following regarding GenWare® figures 3C-16 and 3C-17:


• The AEC Channel display near the top left side of the AEC Setup & Calibration window shows
the selected AEC channel.
• The Progr. Receptors display to the right of the AEC channel display shows which receptors are
programmed for the selected AEC channel.

Definitions of AEC SETUP menu items applicable to the initial AEC setup.
FUNCTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
(MEMBRANE (GenWare®)
CONSOLE)
CHANNEL Channel Number Selects the AEC channel to be programmed.
LEFT FIELD A graphic Enables or disables the ability to select the left, center, or
depicting the AEC right AEC fields.
CENTER FIELD chamber fields. Membrane console:
RIGHT FIELD
YES: The selected field is enabled.
NO: The selected field is disabled.

GenWare®:
Refer to the graphic under Fields:
A black field select rectangle = disabled, a green field
select rectangle = enabled.
CHAMBER TYPE Chamber Type Selects the AEC chamber type.
Membrane console:
ION: Ion chamber.
S/S: Solid-state chamber.
APL: Apelem.

GenWare®:
Ion: Ion chamber.
Solid Solid-state chamber.
State:
Apelem: Apelem.
FILM SCREEN 1 Film Screen Enables or disables the ability to select film screen 1, film
Active screen 2, or film screen 3.
FILM SCREEN 2
Membrane console:
FILM SCREEN 3
YES: The selected film screen is enabled.
NO: The selected film screen is disabled.

GenWare®:
Checking 1, 2, or 3 under Film Screen Active enables
that film screen.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-49
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3D.4.0 INITIAL AEC SETUP (Cont)

FUNCTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION


(MEMBRANE (GenWare®)
CONSOLE)
R FIELD COMP R. Field Comp Allows left, center, and right field balance. This applies to
solid-state AEC chambers only. The calibration procedure
C FIELD COMP C. Field Comp is described in the section AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE
L FIELD COMP L. Field Comp BUCKY in chapter 3C.

Use these steps to perform the initial AEC setup. Refer to the definitions in the previous table.
Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)
1. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, From the GenWare® GENERATOR
select AEC SETUP. UTILITIES application, select AEC Setup
and Calibration from the Setup menu, or
use the AEC Setup & Calibration button

on the GenWare® toolbar.


2. Select the AEC Setup tab.
3. From AEC SETUP menu 1, select the AEC Under Channel Number (AEC Setup tab),
channel to be programmed. Pressing the select the AEC channel that is to be
CHANNEL button will scroll through the programmed.
available AEC channels.
4. Select LEFT FIELD. Toggle the button to Click the left field on the graphic under
select YES or NO. Fields to enable / disable that field. Black
indicates that the selected field is disabled;
green indicates that the selected field is
enabled.
5. Repeat the above for the center and right Repeat the above for the center and right
fields. fields.
6. Select CHAMBER TYPE. Use the + or – Under Chamber Type, select the desired
buttons to select the desired AEC chamber AEC chamber type.
type.
Select ION if using solid state AEC board assembly 737992.
7. Select the Film Screen options tab.
8. Select FILM SCREEN 1. Toggle the button Under Film Screen Active, select film
to select YES or NO. screen 1. An X in the check box indicates
that film screen 1 is enabled.
9. Repeat the above for film screen 2 and film Repeat the above for film screen 2 and film
screen 3. screen 3.
10. Press >>. Select the AEC setup tab.
11. Select R FIELD COMP. Use the + or – Under Field Compensation, set the R.
buttons to enter the value 0%. This may be Field Comp value to 0. This may be
optimized in a later step if using a solid-state optimized in a later step if using a solid-state
AEC chamber. AEC chamber.

Page 3C-50 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3D.4.0 INITIAL AEC SETUP (Cont)

Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)


12. Repeat the above for C FIELD COMP and L Repeat the above for C. Field Comp and L.
FIELD COMP Field Comp.
13. Repeat the applicable steps in this section Repeat the applicable steps in this section
for the remaining AEC channels. for the remaining AEC channels.
14. Press << and EXIT as required to return to
the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.

3C.7.6 AEC Calibration

Refer to chapter 3D.

3C.7.7 Tube Calibration

Before beginning tube auto calibration, the tube used in this installation must be properly selected, and the
generator limits should be programmed, as described earlier in this chapter.
It is recommended that the tube be conditioned (seasoned) during tube auto calibration, particularly if
the tube has not been used for some time. Refer to chapter 6.

WARNING: THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES PRODUCE X-RAYS. TAKE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO
PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.

CAUTION: ALWAYS VERIFY THE MANUFACTURER OF THE TUBE INSERT. IF THE X-RAY TUBE HAS
BEEN REBUILT, THE TUBE INSERT AND TUBE HOUSING MAY BE FROM DIFFERENT
MANUFACTURERS.

Use these steps to perform the tube auto calibration.


Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)
1. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu Select Auto Tube Calibration from the
select GEN CONFIGURATION. Setup menu, or use the auto calibration

button on the GenWare® toolbar.


2. Select TUBE CALIBRATION.
3. Select FOCAL SPOT. Toggle the button to Under Focus, select the desired focal spot
select the desired focal spot to calibrate to calibrate (small or large).
(SMALL or LARGE). Start with small.
Start with SMALL.
4. Press and hold the X-RAY button (or use the Press and hold the X-RAY button (or use the
optional hand switch) to begin the calibration optional hand switch) to begin the calibration
procedure. procedure.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-51
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.7.7 Tube Calibration (Cont)

Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)


5. When finished calibrating the small focus, Repeat the calibration on the large focal
press RETURN and then repeat calibration spot.
on the large focal spot.
6. When auto-calibration is completed, press
EXIT to return to the GENERATOR SETUP
menu.
7. Press EXIT SETUP to exit out of the setup
and calibration mode and return to the
normal operation mode.

NOTE: SHOULD AN ERROR OCCUR DURING AUTO CALIBRATION, AN ERROR MESSAGE WILL BE
DISPLAYED. THE GENERATOR WILL THEN LIMIT THE TUBES OPERATION TO THE RANGE IN
WHICH IT WAS CALIBRATED, THUS ALLOWING FOR PARTIAL OPERATION OF THE
GENERATOR.

Page 3C-52 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.8.0 DAP PRINTER SETUP

1. Connect the DAP printer to the DATA LINK connector J4 on the rear of the console. Refer to the figure
“Rear of control console” in chapter 2 of the CMP 200 service manual for the connector location.

2. Follow the procedure in 3C.10.2 to set up and test the DAP printer.

NOTE: THE GENERATOR MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR THE SPECIFIC PRINTER (SEIKO
INSTRUMENTS DPU-414 OR SLP-200 PRINTER). THE GENERATOR WILL BE COMPATIBLE
ONLY WITH THE SELECTED PRINTER, THEREFORE ONLY THAT PRINTER MODEL MUST BE
USED IN THIS INSTALLATION.

NOTE: THE PAPER OR LABELS USED IN THE PRINTER MUST MEET ALL APPLICABLE
REGULATIONS. MEDICAL GRADE PAPER OR LABELS, APPROVED FOR MEDICAL RECORDS,
MUST NORMALLY BE USED.

3C.9.0 DAP INTERFACING

3C.9.1 DAP Compatibility

The CMP 200 generator, when equipped with the DAP option, is compatible with the DAP devices listed in
section 3C.10.2. The correct DAP device must be selected in the DAP SETUP menu as described in 3C.10.2
in order to ensure device compatibility.

The DAP chamber, when fitted with the proper interconnect cable, plugs directly into the generator control
board in the generator. When ordering the DAP chamber from the DAP manufacturer, specify the CPI
compatible interconnect cable, if available. This is a special cable terminated with a 9-pin male “D” connector
that is designed to plug directly into the generator control board. If this cable is not available from the DAP
device manufacturer, consult CPI product support for the required cable to connect the DAP chamber to the
generator. Refer to the table below for the CPI cable assembly part numbers.

DAP DEVICE INTERCONNECT CABLE


PTW PX-T11020 736145-00
Gammex-RMI 841S 736146-00
VacuTEC VacuDAP 2004 Contact VacuTEC for this cable assembly.
Scanditronix 120-131 736148-00

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-53
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.9.2 DAP Installation

1. Switch OFF the AC line voltage to the generator at the main disconnect switch. Allow sufficient time for
all capacitors in the generator to discharge.

2. Install the DAP chamber as per the manufacturers instructions. The interconnect cable to the
generator must be as per 3C.9.1.

3. Route the DAP interconnect cable through one of the access slots at the upper rear of the generator,
and then route the cables toward the generator control board. Secure the cable to the lip on the inside
of the cable access slot using tie wraps or equivalent fasteners.

4. Plug the DAP cable into J4 on the generator control board. Tighten the screw locks on the connectors
to secure the cables.

5. Proceed with DAP setup and calibration as per the remainder of this procedure.

3C.10.0 DAP SETUP

3C.10.1 DAP SETUP Menu

The DAP SETUP menus allow setup and calibration of the DAP device.

The DAP SETUP menus for the membrane console are shown below.

MENU 1: DAP SETUP


DAP
* DAP SETUP *
DAP: ON DAP PRINTER: DPU414
DEVICE TYPE 1: 0
CAL. VALUE 1: 1.00 +
TEST VALUE 1: 300 -

EXIT

MENU 2: DAP RESET / TEST / PRINT


EXIT

DAP = 0mGycm2

+
PRINT -

RESET TEST

Page 3C-54 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.10.1 DAP SETUP Menu (Cont)

Figure 3C-20: GenWare® DAP Setup and display windows

3C.10.2 DAP SETUP Menu Items

Definitions of DAP SETUP menu items.


FUNCTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
(MEMBRANE (GenWare®)
CONSOLE)
DAP DAP checkbox Enables or disables the DAP device.
Membrane console:
ON: The DAP function is enabled.
OFF: The DAP function is disabled.

In GenWare®, the DAP function is enabled or disabled via


the DAP checkbox.
DEVICE TYPE 1 Device Type 1 Selects the DAP device.
0 = PTW PX-T11020.
1 = Gammex RMI 841S.
2 = VacuTec VacuDAP 2004.
3 = Scanditronix-Wellhoefer 120-131.
CAL. VALUE 1 Calibration Value Allows the DAP reading to be calibrated by adjusting this
parameter.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-55
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.10.2 DAP SETUP Menu Items (Cont)

FUNCTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION


(MEMBRANE (GenWare®)
CONSOLE)
TEST VALUE 1 Test Value 1 A numeric value, supplied by the DAP device
manufacturer, that represents the number of pulses
generated by the DAP device during TEST mode. Typical
terms used by DAP device manufacturers for this function
are “Test Pulses”, “Test Value”, or “Test Count”, but other
names may be used.
The generator counts the number of pulses generated by
the DAP device during TEST mode, and reports a DAP
failure error message if the actual number of test pulses
are not the same as the manufacturer-supplied test count,
within an allowable margin of error.
DAP PRINTER DAP Printer Allows selection of the DAP printer type, or disabling of the
DAP printer function. This is only available with the DAP
printer option.
OFF: Disables the DAP printer function.
DPU414 Selects the Seiko Instruments DPU-414
: printer.
SLP200: Selects the Seiko Instruments SLP-200
printer.
DAP MEMBRANE CONSOLE ONLY: Allows access to a submenu used to reset the
DAP display, test the DAP device, and print a test label. This selection is
available in the DAP SETUP menu when the DAP function is ON.
PRINT This function is Prints a DAP label. The printer will print the date and time
not available in near the top of the label, and the accumulated Dose-Area
GenWare® Product (mGycm2) near the middle of the label. This
information is retrieved from the generator at the time the
label is printed. Several headings are also printed on the
labels; the corresponding patient information must be
manually entered.
RESET Reset Resets the DAP display to zero.
TEST Test Tests the DAP circuits by counting the number of test
pulses (refer to TEST VALUE 1, above). A pass / fail
message will be presented after the DAP test, and the
actual number of test pulses counted will be displayed.

Page 3C-56 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.10.2 DAP SETUP Menu Items (Cont)

Use these steps to set up the DAP device. DAP calibration is done after DAP setup
Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)
1. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, From the GenWare® GENERATOR
select DAP SETUP. UTILITIES application, select DAP Setup
from the Setup menu, or use the DAP setup

button on the GenWare® toolbar.


2. From DAP SETUP menu 1, select DAP. Check the DAP checkbox to enable the DAP
Toggle the button to select ON or OFF. function.
The DAP device must be enabled if you The DAP device must be enabled if you
wish to continue. wish to continue.
3. Select DEVICE TYPE 1. Use the + or – Select the desired DAP 1 device via the
buttons to select the desired DAP 1 device. Device Type 1 dialog box.
4. Select TEST VALUE 1. Use the + or – Select the test value for DAP device 1 via
buttons to enter the test value for DAP the Test Value 1 dialog box.
device 1.
5. Select DAP PRINTER. Toggle the button to Select the desired printer via the DAP
select OFF, DPU414, or SLP200. Printer dialog box.
6. Press DAP to access the DAP RESET, When DAP is enabled, a DAP display
TEST, and PRINT functions. window is opened immediately below the
GenWare® toolbar, as shown in figure 3C-
20.
7. Press RESET to reset the DAP display to Press Reset to reset the DAP display to
zero. zero.
8. Press TEST to test the DAP system. This Press Test to test the DAP system. This will
will test the DAP chamber and DAP circuits. test the DAP chamber and DAP circuits.
9. Press PRINT to print a DAP label.
10. Press EXIT to return to the DAP SETUP
menu.

3C.11.0 DAP CALIBRATION

The DAP device must be calibrated before use, and the calibration must be periodically checked as per the
DAP device manufacturers requirements, or as per local regulations.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-57
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C11.1 Equipment Required

The following equipment is required for DAP calibration.


• An X-ray cassette and film. The speed of the film / screen is not relevant, as the film is only used to
determine the area that is irradiated at the dose-measurement plane.
An X-ray cassette and film is the preferred method to measure the irradiated area, but if this is not
readily available, for example if this is a digital only system, a procedure is given to determine the required
area using the imaging system.
• A film processor to develop the film, if required.
• A calibrated dosimeter.
• A ruler or tape measure with centimeter markings. This will be needed to measure the exposed area of the
film. If measuring in inches, use a calculator and multiply inches by 2.54 to obtain the measurement in
centimeters.

3C.11.2 DAP Calibration Overview

The first step involved in calibrating the DAP meter in the generator is to carefully make a dose measurement
at a given distance from the X-ray source. The next step is to expose a test film at the same distance from the
X-ray source as the dose measurement that was just made.
The dose-area product is calculated by multiplying the measured dose, in mGy, by the exposed area
of the film, in cm2. This gives the actual dose-area product, in mGycm2.
After the reference dose-area product is determined as described above, it is compared to the DAP
reading as measured by the generator. Adjustments are made to the CAL. VALUE 1 parameter in the DAP
SETUP menu such that the consoles DAP display corresponds to the calculated dose-area product. This
procedure may need to be repeated several times until the required accuracy is obtained.
The reason the DAP device (a specialized ion chamber) is able to accurately measure the dose-area
product at its location at the bottom of the collimator is that although the radiation level falls off at a rate
inversely proportional to the square of the distance from the source, the irradiated area increases as the
square of the distance from the source. For example, by doubling the distance, the dose falls to (½)2 = ¼ of
the previous dose BUT the area increases to 22 = 4 times the area. Therefore, the dose-area product will
remain constant at a given distance from the source. This is also the reason that care must be taken to ensure
that the area measurement is done at the same distance from the X-ray source as the dose measurement.

Page 3C-58 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.11.3 DAP Calibration Procedure

CTM

TUBE 1

DAP chamber 1

70 cm

Dosimeter plane and film plane


20 cm

DAP chamber 2

TUBE 2

TYPICAL SETUP FOR DAP CALIBRATION


FILE: DAP.CDR

Figure 3C-21: DAP setup

Use these steps to calibrate the DAP meter(s) in the generator.


Step Action
1. Set up the dosimeter as per figure 3C-21. The probe should be centered
relative to the central ray from the X-ray tube, and sufficiently far off the
tabletop to minimize scatter radiation. Do not use any absorber during this
procedure.
2. Open the collimator such that the field size at the location of the probe is
approximately 12 cm X 12 cm. Ensure that the probe is fully irradiated.
4. Enter the DAP SETUP menu.
6. Set the generator to 70 kV, 100 mA, 20 ms.
7. Press DAP to access the RESET / TEST /PRINT menu, then press RESET to
reset the DAP display to zero. The DAP will reset to zero, then the generator
will return to the DAP SETUP menu.
8. Make an X-ray exposure and note the dose per the dosimeter. Record the mR
or mGy value in a copy of table 3C-4. Convert the mR value to mGy, if
necessary.
9. Note the DAP value as displayed on the console, and record the value in a
copy of table 3C-4.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-59
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.11.3 DAP Calibration Procedure (Cont)

Step Action
10. Replace the dosimeter with an X-ray cassette and film if available. The film
plane must be at the same location as the dosimeter was in step 8.
If using an image sensor such as an I.I., or flat panel, or other non-film image
sensor, the image pickup plane must be at the same location as the dosimeter
was in step 8.
THE IMPORTANCE OF THIS STEP CANNOT BE OVERSTATED: THE
IRRADIATED AREA MEASUREMENT MUST BE MADE AT A POINT THAT
IS THE SAME DISTANCE FROM THE X-RAY SOURCE AS THE DOSE WAS
MEASURED AT.
11. Ensure that the collimator field at the measurement plane is smaller than the
active area of the image pick-up device (film, I.I., or other). Refer to figure 3C-
22.
Do not readjust the collimator from the setting that was used in step 8.
12. Make another exposure using the same settings as in step 6.
13. Develop the film (if used).
14. Measure the irradiated image area. For film, measure the length and width of
the exposed area, and record the results in table 3C-4. Refer to figure 3C-22.
If using a digital imaging system, some systems have a cursor available that
allows measurement of the length and width of the area in question. If the
digital imaging system does not allow image size measurement, it is suggested
that an X-ray opaque item of known dimensions be placed at the image plane.
(A collimator test tool would be useful in this application). The length and width
of the irradiated area can then be extrapolated by comparison to the size of the
reference object. Record the length and width of the irradiated area at the
measurement plane in table 3C-4.
15. Calculate the irradiated image area, in cm2. Use the length and width recorded
in table 3C-4.
16. Calculate the dose-area product by multiplying the area from table 3C-4 X the
dose in mGy from table 3C-4. Record the resulting value at step 3 in table 3C-
4.
17. Calculate the percentage error between the manually calculated DAP
measurement (table 3C-4, step 3) and the measured DAP value (table 3C-4,
step 4). Record the percentage error in step 5 of the table.
18. If the displayed DAP reading does not meet the required accuracy, increase or
decrease CAL. VALUE 1 (membrane console) or Calibration Value (DAP
Device Type 1) for GenWare® by the same percentage as the percentage
error.
19. Repeat steps 7 to 18 until the required accuracy is obtained. Make as many
copies of table 3C-4 as required to record the results from all required
iterations.

Page 3C-60 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.11.3 DAP Calibration Procedure (Cont)

X-RAY CASSETTE
13.2

EXPOSED 13.6
AREA

ILLUMINATED DEVELOPED FILM


COLLIMATOR
FIELD

Figure 3C-22: Irradiated area vs. available image area

3C.11.4 DAP Calculation Worksheet

STEP ACTION RESULT

1. Measured dose: _____________ mR

Convert mR to mGy if necessary by multiplying mR X


0.00873. Example 23.3 mR X 0.00873 = 0.203 mGy. _____________ mGy

2. Measure and record the exposed area of the film (Length _____________ Length (cm)
X Width).
_____________ Width (cm)

Calculate the exposed area in cm2 (length X width).


_____________ Area (cm2)

3. Multiply the dose in mGy (step 1) X the area in cm2 (step


2). This will yield the actual dose-area product, in _____________ DAP
mGycm2. (mGycm2)

4. Record the DAP, in mGycm2, as displayed on the console. _____________ DAP


(mGycm2)

5. Calculate the percentage error: Refer to the example at _____________ % error


the end of this section.

THIS TABLE IS REPEATED BELOW FOR THE SECOND ITERATION OF THE DAP CALIBRATION.

STEP ACTION RESULT

1. Measured dose: _____________ mR

Convert mR to mGy if necessary by multiplying mR X


0.00873. Example 23.3 mR X 0.00873 = 0.203 mGy. _____________ mGy

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-61
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.11.4 DAP Calculation Worksheet (Cont)

2. Measure and record the exposed area of the film (Length _____________ Length (cm)
X Width).
_____________ Width (cm)

Calculate the exposed area in cm2 (length X width).


_____________ Area (cm2)

3. Multiply the dose in mGy (step 1) X the area in cm2 (step


2). This will yield the actual dose-area product, in _____________ DAP
mGycm2. (mGycm2)

4. Record the DAP, in mGycm2, as displayed on the console. _____________ DAP


(mGycm2)

5. Calculate the percentage error: Refer to the example at _____________ % error


the end of this section.

Table 3C-4: DAP worksheets

Refer to the sample DAP worksheet below:

STEP ACTION RESULT

1. Measured dose: ____23.3_____ mR

Convert mR to mGy if necessary by multiplying mR X


0.00873. Example 23.3 mR X 0.00873 = 0.203 mGy. ____0.203____ mGy

2. Measure and record the exposed area of the film (Length ____13.6_____ Length (cm)
X Width).
____13.2_____ Width (cm)

Calculate the exposed area in cm2 (length X width).


___179.52____ Area (cm2)

3. Multiply the dose in mGy (step 1) X the area in cm2 (step


2). This will yield the actual dose-area product, in ____36.44____ DAP (mGycm2)
mGycm2.

4. Record the DAP, in mGycm2, as displayed on the ____40_______ DAP (mGycm2)


console.

5. Calculate the percentage error: Refer to the example at ____-8.9______ % error


the end of this section.

Page 3C-62 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.11.4 DAP Calculation Worksheet (Cont)

Sample percentage error calculation (step 5):

(36.44 - 40) -3.56


X 100 = X 100 = -8.9 %
40 40

3C.12.0 DATA LINK

Used with the CPI GenWare® utility software. This allows for data communication with a computer in order to
download additional tube types, transfer APR data, edit APR text, run the A2EC2 ™ utility, perform setup and
calibration functions, and for other minor functions. Further documentation is included with GenWare®.
A computer (i.e. laptop) and a 9 pin null modem cable with socket connectors (female) on both ends
are required to run this software and interface to the generator.

The computer running GenWare® is normally connected to the DATA LINK connector on the rear of the
control console. Refer to the figure “Rear of control console” in chapter 2 for the location of this connector.
If the data link connector is not available, i.e. on units without a CPI supplied console, the computer
running GenWare® must be connected to J3 on the generator control board as described below. A special
serial cable with a 9 pin female “D” connector on one end and an RJ45 ethernet style connector on the other
end is needed for this step. This cable is available from CPI.
• Connect the custom serial cable, as described above, from the serial port on your laptop to J3 on the
generator control board.
• Switch the generator on. This must be done via the ON switch S2 on the generator control board.
• Start the GenWare® generator utilities application on the laptop.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-63
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.13.0 TOUCHSCREEN SYSTEM UTILITIES

This section applies to generators with the touchscreen option only.

The system utilities menu allows access to the following functions:


FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
APR Editor Allows the APR to be edited. Changes may be saved to memory.
APR Backup / Restore Allows the APR data to be backed up, and backed-up APR data to be
restored. The factory-default APR is available in several languages.
This also allows APR files to be saved to a laptop, and saved APR
files to be downloaded from a laptop.
Date / Time Setup Allows the touchscreen’s date and time to be set or changed.
Receptor Symbols Allows predefined receptor symbols to be assigned to each image
receptor button.
Touch Screen Setup • Allows for the setting of specific console operating parameters.
• Sets up the serial communication ports on the touchscreen
console.
• Sets the screen saver interval.
• Allows adjustment of the sound volume.
• Enables / disables compatible equipment (i.e. Infimed digital
interface).
• Allows the operator and service passwords to be changed.
Touch Screen Calibration Allows for electrical alignment of the touch sensitive membrane with
the “buttons” displayed on the touchscreen.
Data Link Prepares the console for communication with an external computer.
Main Menu Press to return to the main console menu.

3C.13.1 Accessing the Utilities Menu

Use these steps to access the systems utilities functions.


Step Action
1. From the main console menu (figure 3C-23), press System Utilities. A pop-up window will
be displayed (figure 3C-24), requesting a password.
2. Press 1, 9, 7, 3 in sequence to continue. This is the factory-default service password, and
allows access to all of the functions listed above.
• Press Clear to cancel an incorrect password.
• Press Cancel to return to the main menu.
• Press Accept to access the system utilities menu. After a brief delay, the
system utilities menu (figure 3C-25) will be displayed. The message Access Denied
indicates that an incorrect password was used. The factory-default password may be
changed by a service engineer as described later in this supplement. If this was
done, the password defined above will not allow access to the system utilities
menu.

Page 3C-64 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.13.1 Accessing the Utilities Menu (Cont)

Figure 3C-23: Main menu

Figure 3C-24: Password window

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-65
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.13.1 Accessing the Utilities Menu (Cont)

Figure 3C-25: System utilities menu

3C.13.2 APR Editor

It is strongly suggested that you review the section ANATOMICAL PROGRAMMING SELECTOR in the
operator’s manual before proceeding. A good understanding of the terminology and APR menu
structures is needed to make APR changes.

Use these steps to access the APR editor function.


Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press APR Editor. A screen similar in appearance to the
normal operating screen will be displayed (figure 3C-26). However, as a reminder that you
are in APR editor mode, the word APR EDITOR will be displayed in the APR window.
2. Refer to the applicable subsections (following) for the procedures to change parameters
and technique for existing APR items, and to edit, add, or delete APR, procedural, or menu
items.

Page 3C-66 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.13.2 APR Editor (Cont)

Figure 3C-26: APR editor window

NOTE: THE DISPLAY ON YOUR SYSTEM MAY VARY DEPENDING ON GENERATOR TYPE, AND ON
PROGRAMMING AND TECHNIQUE SELECTIONS.
MINOR VARIATIONS MAY EXIST IN COLOR SCHEME AND GRAPHIC STYLES (SKINS) TO SUIT
SPECIFIC CUSTOMER REQUIREMENTS.

NOTE: When a region of interest (i.e. SKULL) is selected, a pop-up menu will appear similar to
that in normal APR mode. In addition to “new” <Add>, <Edit>, and <Delete> buttons, a
<Move Up> and <Move Down> button will be displayed.
The <Move Up> and <Move Down> buttons allow the items in a menu or submenu to
be rearranged. To do this, select the item to be moved. This will highlight the item.
Press <Move Up> to move the selected item up in the list, and <Move Down> to move
the selected item down in the list.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-67
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.13.2 APR Editor (Cont)

To change parameters or techniques for an existing APR item.


Step Action
1. Select the APR item to be changed. If the APR item is in a submenu of a menu or
procedural item, select the parent menu item or procedural item, then press Open Sub-
Menu. It may be necessary to drill down through several submenus to find the desired APR
item.
2. When the selected APR item is highlighted, select the patient size. The desired parameters
/ technique may be changed for that patient size (kV and mA, mAs, ms, density, AEC /
mA/ms / mAs, focal spot, film screen, AEC fields, image receptor). Repeat for all patient
sizes for that APR item as required. The highlight will change to red when the programmed
APR has been altered.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for other APR items within that menu or submenu, if applicable.
4. Press BACK when finished changing APR items in that menu / submenu. This may need to
be done more than once to return to the top APR menu for the selected region of interest. A
pop-up window will display asking if you wish to save the changes. Press YES to save the
changes; CANCEL cancels the changes.

NOTE: When editing or adding an APR item, menu item, or procedural item, an English
keyboard will pop up at the bottom of the screen. A partial keyboard with international
symbols may be displayed at the top of the screen. To display the desired
international characters, select the language of your choice from the list near the top
right side of the screen. Characters may then be entered via either keyboard.

To edit (change the name of) an APR item.


Step Action
1. Select the APR item as per step 1 under “To change parameters or technique for an
existing APR item”. The selection will be highlighted.
2. Press Edit. Keyboard(s) will display on the screen as described above, with the current
name of the APR item highlighted.
• Press CANCEL on the lower keyboard to exit without changing the
name.
• Press DEL to delete the highlighted name on the keyboard.
• Type in the new name for that APR item. Use the BACKSPACE key to
back space if corrections are needed.
• Press ENTER when finished.

Page 3C-68 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.13.2 APR Editor (Cont)

To delete an APR item.


Step Action
1. Select the APR item to be deleted. The selection will be highlighted.
2. Press Delete. A pop-up window will display asking if you are sure you want to delete this
item. Press YES to delete the item; NO cancels the deletion.

To add an APR item.


Step Action
1. Select the appropriate location to add the APR item. An APR item may be added directly to
a main APR menu, or may be added to a submenu of another menu or procedural item.
If the APR item is to be added to a submenu of a menu or procedural item, select
the parent menu item or procedural item, then press Open Sub-Menu. It may be necessary
to drill down through several submenus to find the desired location for the new APR item.
2. Press Add. A pop-up window will display allowing you to select three item types to be
added. Select APR Item (this is the default selection, and the only available selection if
adding to a procedural menu).
3. Press OK to continue. Cancel will cancel this action.
4. Keyboard(s) will display on the screen as described previously.
• Type in the name of the new APR item.
• Press ENTER when finished.
• The new APR item will appear on the selected menu or submenu.
• Change the parameters and technique as per the subsection “To
change parameters or technique for an existing APR item”.

To add, edit, or delete a procedural item.


Step Action
1. To delete a procedural item, follow the steps in “To delete an APR item”. Doing so will
also delete the submenu associated with that procedural item.
2. To edit a procedural item, follow the steps in “To edit (change the name of) an APR
item”.
3. To add a procedural item, follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add an APR item”, except select APR
Procedure in step 2.
4. Keyboard(s) will display on the screen as described previously.
• Type in the name of the new procedural item.
• Press ENTER when finished.
• The new procedural item will appear on the selected menu or
submenu.
• Select the newly added procedural item. The selection will be
highlighted.
• Press Open Sub-Menu. A “generic” APR item named FIRST ITEM has
been automatically inserted in that submenu.
• You may now edit the name and change the parameters and technique
for that APR item, and add additional APR items for that procedural
item as per previous steps.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-69
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.13.2 APR Editor (Cont)

To add, edit, or delete a menu item.


Step Action
1. To delete a menu item, follow the steps in “To delete an APR item”. Doing so will also
delete the submenu associated with that menu item.
2. To edit a menu item, follow the steps in “To edit (change the name of) an APR item”.
3. To add a menu item, follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add an APR item”, except select APR
Menu in step 2.
4. Keyboard(s) will display on the screen as described previously.
• Type in the name of the new menu item.
• Press ENTER when finished.
• The new menu item will appear on the selected menu or submenu.
• Select the newly added menu item. The selection will be highlighted.
• Press Open Sub-Menu. A “generic” APR item named FIRST ITEM has
been automatically inserted in that submenu.
• You may now edit the name and change the parameters and technique
for that APR item, and add additional APR items for that menu item as
per previous steps.

Page 3C-70 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.13.3 APR Backup / Restore

Use these steps to access the APR backup / restore function.


Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press APR Backup / Restore. A pop-up window (figure 3C-
27) will display showing the available backup files and the factory-default APR files in
various languages. Pressing Close will exit the backup and restore menu.
2. Refer to the applicable subsections (following) for the procedures to back-up the current
APR data, to restore saved APR data, and to upload and download APR files to and from a
laptop. The entire APR (parameters and techniques, APR text, menu structures, etc) is
backed up.

Figure 3C-27: APR back-up and restore window

To back-up current APR data.


Step Action
1. Press Backup.
2. Keyboard(s) will display on the screen as described previously.
• Type in the name of the new backup file.
• Press ENTER when finished. The console will return to the APR
backup / restore menu.
• A pop-up window will display indicating that the backup was successful.
Press OK to continue.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-71
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.13.3 APR Backup / Restore (Cont)

To restore backed-up APR data.


Step Action
1.
Select the APR data file to be restored. The selection will be highlighted.
2. Press Restore.
3. After a brief delay, a pop-up window will display indicating that restore was successful.
Press OK.

To delete an APR data file.


Step Action
1. Select the APR data file to be deleted. The selection will be highlighted.
2. Press Delete. A pop-up window will display asking if you are sure you want to delete this
file. Press YES to delete the file; NO cancels the deletion.

To restore the factory default APR data.


Step Action
1. Press Factory Defaults.
2. After a brief delay, a pop-up window will display indicating that restore was successful.
Press OK.

APR upload / download.


Step Action
1. The APR upload and download utilities allow APR files on the touchscreen to be saved to a
laptop, or saved APR files on a laptop to be downloaded to the touchscreen.
2. In order to use this feature, a serial communications program that supports the Z-modem
serial protocol must be installed on the laptop. Two examples of such programs include
Hyper Terminal and Telix for Windows, but there are others.
3. To prepare the laptop to communicate with the touchscreen refer to the documentation for
the serial communications program. You will normally need to select a serial port on the
laptop, typically COM1. If you are unable to open COM1, or the serial port of your choice,
make sure you are not running any other program that uses the serial port such as
GenWare®.
4. Use the following parameters to configure the serial communications program:
Baud / bits per second: 57600
Parity: None
Data bits: 8
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: Hardware
5. A 9-pin null modem cable with socket connectors (female) on both ends is needed. Connect
one end to the communications port that was selected in step 3. The other end will typically
connect to the Data Link connector on the back of the touchscreen. The DAP printer, if
used, may temporarily need to be disconnected.

Page 3C-72 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.13.3 APR Backup / Restore (Cont)

Step Action
6. Set up the communications port on the touchscreen as described in the section TOUCH
SCREEN SETUP, under Settings.
7. To copy an APR file from the touchscreen to the laptop, select the desired file. Then press

.
A file-transfer status window will pop up. This shows the file being sent, and the status of
the transmission.
8. To copy an APR file from the laptop to the touchscreen, you will need to select the file via
your communications program. Then press “send” on the laptop or use the equivalent

command. After pressing “send” on the laptop, press on the


touchscreen. This will initiate the file transfer to the touchscreen. A file-transfer status
window will pop up. This shows the file being sent, and the status of the transmission.

3C.13.4 Date / Time Setup

Use these steps to perform the date and time setup.


Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press Date / Time Setup. A pop-up window that allows
setting of the date and time will display (figure 3C-28).
2. TO SET THE YEAR:
Press the up or down arrows adjacent to Year to select the desired year. The selected year
will display to the left of the up / down selection buttons.
3. TO SET THE MONTH:
Press the up or down arrows adjacent to Month to select the desired month. The selected
month will display to the left of the up / down selection buttons.
4. TO SET THE DATE:
Press to select the desired date on the calendar that is displayed.
5. TO SET THE HOUR
Press the up or down arrows to the right of Hour to select the desired hour. The selected
hour will display to the left of the up / down selection buttons. This must be selected in 24
hour format, i.e. 2 PM would be entered as hour 14.
6. TO SET THE MINUTE
Press the up or down arrows to the right of Minute to select the desired minute. The
selected minute will display to the left of the up / down selection buttons.
The current time will be displayed under Current Time.
7. Press Apply to apply the current date and time settings without exiting the date and time
menu. Pressing OK will apply the current settings and return to the system utilities menu.
Cancel returns to the system utilities menu without applying changes to the time or date.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-73
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.13.4 Date / Time Setup (Cont)

Figure 3C-28: Date and time setup window

Page 3C-74 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.13.5 Receptor Symbols

The current image receptor symbols may be replaced with predefined symbols chosen from the receptor
symbols library.
Each image receptor button will always select a predefined image receptor (i.e. table Bucky, wall
Bucky, DR, etc.). Before changing the image receptor symbols, it must be clearly understood which image
receptors are selected by each image receptor button. Each image receptor button should then have a logical
and intuitive symbol assigned to that position.

Use these steps to change the receptor symbols.


Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press Receptor Symbols.
2. A pop-up window will display (figure 3C-29) showing the image receptor buttons with the
currently assigned symbols near the right side of the receptor symbols window, and the
library of available receptor symbols near the left side of the window.
3. Select the image receptor button for which the symbol is to be changed. The receptor
numbers in figure 3C-29 correspond to the receptor numbers in GenWare®, and are shown
for reference only. For CMP 200, only receptors 1 to 3 are available.
4. Select an appropriate symbol for the selected receptor from the symbols library. The
selected symbol will be highlighted.
5.
Press to assign the selected symbol to the selected image receptor button.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each image receptor whose symbol is to be changed.
7. Press OK to continue or CANCEL to return to the system utilities menu without making any
changes. If OK was pressed, a pop-up window will display asking if you wish to save the
changes. Press YES to save the changes. Press NO to return to the system utilities menu;
CANCEL cancels the changes.
8. To delete unused symbols from the receptor symbols library, select the symbol to be
deleted. The selected symbol will be highlighted.

• Press .
• A pop-up window will display asking if you wish to delete the selected item. Press YES
to delete the item; NO cancels the deletion.
• DO NOT DELETE SYMBOLS YOU MAY WANT TO USE IN THE FUTURE.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-75
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.13.5 Receptor Symbols (Cont)

Figure 3C-29: Receptor symbols window

3C.13.6 TouchScreen Setup

The touchscreen setup menu accesses submenus that allow the service engineer to perform the following
functions:
• Enable or disable certain console functions (voice messaging, audible generator ready indication, auto
power off).
• Set up serial communication ports COM 3 and COM 4 on the touchscreen console.
• Select the language for operator and error messages and graphics (i.e. on buttons, etc).
• Select the generator type.
• Select the screen saver interval.
• Select the sound volume.
• Change the operator and service password.
• Review the console error log.

Use these steps to access the touchscreen setup menu.


Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press Touch Screen Setup.
2. The touchscreen setup window will be displayed (figure 3C-30). This has four tabs,
SETTINGS, FEATURES, PASSWORDS, and ERROR LOGS that will be discussed in
sequence.

Page 3C-76 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.13.6 TouchScreen Setup (Cont)

Figure 3C-30: TouchScreen setup window, Settings tab

• The System Code is a unique code assigned to each touchscreen on which the software is installed.
• The License is a code specifically assigned to each touchscreen. This enables options in the features tab.
Please consult the factory to obtain a new license code if it is desired to enable new features, or to reinstall
the existing license should the license code be accidentally overwritten.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-77
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.13.6 TouchScreen Setup (Cont)

Settings
The functions near the left side of the settings window are enabled when checked (√).
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Voice Messaging Enables / disables verbal status and error messages.
On (√): Error and status messages will be annunciated. Languages
other than English may not be available.
Off: Verbal status and error messages are disabled.
Continuous Not applicable.
Fluoro Tone
Indicate Enables / disables the audible generator ready sounds (voice and / or tone).
Generator Ready A tone will sound when the generator is ready to make an
On (√):
exposure (while pressing the PREP button, or briefly before
making an exposure while the X-RAY button is pressed).
Off: A tone will not sound when the generator is ready to make an
exposure. A text message only will be presented.
Auto Power Off Sets the console power-off mode.
On (√): The console will automatically switch off when it has detected
that the generator has been switched off.
Off: The console must be switched off manually.

Use these steps to change the parameters on the settings tab.


Step Action
1. Program the functions defined in the table above by checking or unchecking the applicable
item.
2. This selects the communication port for the optional digital interface on the touchscreen.
This does not apply at this time.
3. Program the DAP Port. This selects the communication port for the optional DAP printer.
The DAP printer will typically be connected to the Data Link connector on the touchscreen
interface board on the back of the touchscreen. The Data Link connector is directly
connected to COM 3 on the touchscreen. If using these connections, the DAP port will need
to be set to COM 3.
4. Program the Transfer Port. This selects the communication port for serial communication
to a laptop for the Data Link function and for the file transfer function. The laptop may be
connected to the Data Link connector on the touchscreen interface board on the back of the
touchscreen, or to COM 4 on the back of the touchscreen. The transfer port will need to be
set to COM 3 or COM 4 accordingly.
5. Program the Languages. This selects the language for operator and error messages, and
for text on the buttons, etc. Voice messages may only be available in English.

Page 3C-78 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.13.6 TouchScreen Setup (Cont)

Step Action
6. Select the Generator Type. Use CMP 200. The touchscreen will not properly communicate
with the generator unless this is set correctly.
7. Set the Screen Saver Interval. This sets the time from the last activity on the touchscreen
until the screen saver is activated.
8. Set the Sound Volume by dragging the slider to the left (lower) or right (louder). This sets
the loudness of the voice messages and button clicks.
9. Press OK to continue or CANCEL to return to the system utilities menu without making any
changes. If OK was pressed, a pop-up window will display asking if you wish to save the
changes. Press YES to save the changes. Press NO to return to the system utilities menu;
CANCEL cancels the changes.

Features
Use these steps to select the digital functions.
Step Action
1. From the touchscreen setup window, select FEATURES. Available digital interfaces will be
shown on this screen.

Figure 3C-31: TouchScreen setup window, Features tab

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-79
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.13.6 TouchScreen Setup (Cont)

Step Action
2. Check the applicable item to enable that function.
3. Press OK to continue or CANCEL to return to the system utilities menu without making any
changes. If OK was pressed, a pop-up window will display asking if you wish to save the
changes. Press YES to save the changes. Press NO to return to the system utilities menu;
CANCEL cancels the changes.

Passwords
Use these steps to change the current operator and service passwords.
Step Action
1. From the touchscreen setup window, select PASSWORDS.
2. To change the operator password, press the … button to the right of the top operator
password line. A password window will pop up. Enter the new password.
• Press Clear to cancel an incorrect entry.
• Press Cancel to close the password pop-up window.
• Press Accept to accept the new password.
3. Repeat the previous step to enter the new password on the second operator password line.

Figure 3C-32: TouchScreen setup window, Passwords tab

Page 3C-80 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Programming 3C
3C.13.6 TouchScreen Setup (Cont)

Step Action
4. Press OK to continue; CANCEL cancels the changes.
5. A pop-up window will display asking if you wish to save the changes. Press YES to save the
changes. Press NO to return to the system utilities menu; CANCEL cancels the changes.
BE SURE TO RECORD THE NEW SERVICE PASSWORD BEFORE CHANGING THE
FACTORY-DEFAULT PASSWORD. IF THE NEW PASSWORD IS SUBSEQUENTLY
LOST, CONSULT THE FACTORY OR RE-INSTALL THE TOUCHSCREEN SOFTWARE
IN ORDER TO RESTORE THE FACTORY-DEFAULT SERVICE PASSWORD.
6. To change the service password, press the … button to the right of the top service
password line. A password window will pop up. Enter the new password.
• Press Clear to cancel an incorrect entry.
• Press Cancel to close the password pop-up window.
• Press Accept to accept the new password.
7. Repeat the previous step to enter the new password on the second service password line.
8. Press OK to continue; CANCEL cancels the changes.
9. A pop-up window will display asking if you wish to save the changes. Press YES to save the
changes. Press NO to return to the system utilities menu; CANCEL cancels the changes.

Error Logs
The error logs function records console errors only. This screen exists for CPI debugging purposes. The
information recorded will generally be of no value to field-service personnel.

3C.13.7 TouchScreen Calibration

The touchscreen calibration function should be performed if touching the center of a buttons does not activate
that function, i.e. if the touch-sensitive area appears displaced from the center of the corresponding icon.

Use these steps to perform the touchscreen calibration.


Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press Touch Screen Calibration.
2. A pop-up window will display indicating that in order to complete the calibration, the center
of each target must be pressed. Press OK.
3. Press CANCEL to exit without performing the calibration.
4. Press the center of the target at the top left of the screen. This will set up the touch sensitive
area in that quadrant.
5. Repeat the previous step for the three remaining targets.
6. A pop-up window will display asking if you wish to accept this calibration. Press YES to
accept the calibration; NO returns to the system utilities menu.
7. If you pressed YES in the previous step, the touchscreen will restart with the new calibration
values.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T Page 3C-81
3C Interfacing and Programming CPI Canada Inc.

3C.13.7 TouchScreen Calibration (Cont)

Step Action
8. When the touchscreen console restarts, the touchscreen calibration needs to be verified. A
screen indicating Please press the target buttons… will appear. You must press the
center of the target at the top left of the screen, plus the center of the next three targets
within 30 seconds.
• If the calibration was done properly, you will be taken to the main menu.
• If the calibration in steps 4 and 5 was not done properly, it will not be possible to press
the center of the targets in this step. The calibration program will run again, allowing
you to redo the touchscreen calibration.

3C.13.8 Data Link

This is used with the CPI GenWare® utility software. This allows for data communication with a computer in
order to download additional tube types, transfer APR data, edit APR text, run the A2EC2 ™ utility, perform
setup and calibration functions, and for other minor functions. Further documentation is included with
GenWare®.
A computer (i.e. laptop) and a 9 pin null modem cable with socket connectors (female) on both ends
are required to run this software and interface to the generator.

Page 3C-82 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-04 Rev. T
CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D

CHAPTER 3D

AEC CALIBRATION
CONTENTS:

3D.1.0 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................................3D-2
3D.1.1 AEC Limitations: Minimum and Maximum Exposure Times ......................................................................3D-3
3D.1.2 Film/Screen Response vs. kV .....................................................................................................................3D-3
3D.1.3 AEC Calibration Range ...............................................................................................................................3D-4
3D.2.0 PRECALIBRATION SETUP ...........................................................................................................................3D-5
3D.2.1 AEC Setup Worksheet ................................................................................................................................3D-5
3D.2.2 AEC Precalibration Checks.........................................................................................................................3D-7
3D.2.3 AEC Chamber Installation ...........................................................................................................................3D-7
3D.2.4 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers)............................................................................................................3D-9
3D.2.5 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers)..........................................................................................................3D-11
3D.2.6 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) ......................................................................................................................3D-13
3D.2.7 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) ......................................................................................................................3D-15
3D.2.8 Precalibration Notes ..................................................................................................................................3D-17
3D.2.9 Required Test Equipment..........................................................................................................................3D-17
3D.3.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY).........................................................................................................3D-18
3D.4.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION.........................................................................................................3D-26
3D.5.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION.....................................................................................................................3D-27
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) ..........................................................................................................3D-33
3D.7.0 AEC CALIBRATION (MISC) .........................................................................................................................3D-36

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-1


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This section describes the interfacing and calibration of the various AEC board assemblies that are used in
CMP 200 X-ray generators.

THE GENERATOR IS FACTORY CONFIGURED FOR SPECIFIC AEC CHAMBERS. REFER TO THE
COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT IN CHAPTER 1 FOR THE FACTORY CONFIGURED AEC
COMPATIBILITY OF THIS GENERATOR.

The introduction in this section contains background information relevant to AEC operation. It is strongly
suggested that this be read and understood before beginning AEC calibration.

Page 3D-2 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.1.1 AEC Limitations: Minimum and Maximum Exposure Times

AEC exposures should normally be kept well under one second. When X-ray techniques are used that result
in longer exposures, the film density will not be correct due to failure of reciprocity of the film.

Care must be exercised when using low kV values with table Buckys because most table tops and grids
absorb considerable radiation in the range of 60 – 65 kV. This will adversely affect AEC operation.

3D.1.2 Film/Screen Response vs. kV

Film screen response to kV is not linear. Therefore, compensation must be provided in order to maintain
constant film density as kV is changed for different anatomical studies. By selecting and calibrating various
kV breakpoints, the overall system response will be compensated such as to yield a constant film density.
Up to eight breakpoints per film screen combination are available. The eight breakpoints are spread
over three kV ranges as shown below:
• Low kV: 50, 55, 65 kV.
• Knee kV: 75 kV.
• High kV: 85, 95, 110, 130 kV.

Refer to figure 3D-1.

Figure 3D-1: kV vs relative density

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-3


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.1.3 AEC Calibration Range

Since the CMP 200 family of X-ray generators allows for up to three separate film screen combinations to be
calibrated, the following points must be considered:
• The AEC board allows for a zero to a maximum of 10-volt ramp at the comparator input. All AEC signals
must fit within this range (for all film / screens, densities, and techniques).
• Most X-ray film-based applications require the use of two or more different film screen combinations, all
of which will require different exposure doses.
• Using the slowest film screen combination, the required film input dose will be determined.
• Once this value is determined (during AEC calibration), the density calibration is performed to allow
100% (double the dose) and 50% (half the dose) values. These are typical values, and will determine
the maximum required range of the AEC reference voltage (the output from the D/A converter).
• Figure 3D-2 illustrates the different windows required for various film screen combinations.

X = Knee dose (density) at 75 kV


= Half the knee dose
= Double the knee dose
FAST x
-8 +8

MEDIUM x
-8 +8

SLOW x
-8 +8

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

AEC CALIBRATION NUMBERS (D/A OUTPUT)


FILE: ML_AECDA.CDR

Figure 3D-2: Film/screen speed vs. D/A output

Page 3D-4 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.2.0 PRECALIBRATION SETUP

3D.2.1 AEC Setup Worksheet

Before continuing, it is suggested that a copy of the table below be filled in with all required information.
Refer to the example AEC setup worksheet on the next page.

FUNCTION RECEPTOR 1 RECEPTOR 2 RECEPTOR 3

Film/Screen 1.

2.

3.

Nominal optical density:

Grid ratio/SID:

Min - max kV range:

± Density steps

Density mAs +%:


(dose) change
(per step)
-%:

Chamber type:
Regulatory AEC dose
requirements?
Is film processing maintained?

Assigned receptor name:

Are all cassettes similar?

Additional notes:

Additional notes:

Table 3D-1: AEC setup worksheet

ALL RECEPTORS MUST HAVE THE SAME NUMBER OF DENSITY STEPS AND THE SAME DENSITY DOSE
CHANGE PER STEP (DENSITY SETTINGS ARE COMMON TO ALL FILM SCREENS AND RECEPTORS).

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-5


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.2.1 AEC Setup Worksheet (Cont)

Note: The example below is supplied for reference only. It does not represent an actual installation.

FUNCTION RECEPTOR 1 RECEPTOR 2 RECEPTOR 3

Film/Screen 1. Lanex/reg Lanex/reg Lanex/reg

2. Lanex/med Lanex/chest

3.

Nominal optical density: 1.2 1.1 1.4

Grid ratio/SID: 12:1 8:1 10:1

Min - max kVp range: 60 - 120 65 - 140 80 - 110

± Density steps ±8 ±8 ±8

Density mAs +%: 12.5 12.5 12.5


(dose) change
(per step)
-%: 6.25 6.25 6.25

Chamber type: Ion Solid state Ion


Regulatory AEC dose Yes Yes Yes
requirements?
Is film processing maintained? Yes Yes Yes

Assigned receptor name: Table Wall Aux

Are all cassettes similar? Yes Yes Yes

Additional notes:

Additional notes:

Table 3D-2: Sample AEC setup worksheet

Page 3D-6 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.2.2 AEC Precalibration Checks

It is recommended that a copy of the form below be filled in with the required information before attempting
AEC calibration.

1. Verify that the AEC chambers are mounted correctly CHECK:


in the Bucky. Note that some chamber types must
be physically isolated from equipment ground, refer
to figure 3D-3 as an example.
2. Verify that each AEC chamber / pickup is properly CHECK:
connected to its intended input channel on the AEC
board.
3.
Make and type of AEC chamber/pickup: AEC Ch 1_____________________________

AEC Ch 2_____________________________

AEC Ch 3_____________________________
4. Verify signal grounding for the AEC chamber. The CHECK:
only electrical ground should be at the AEC board in
the generator. This applies to the ground braid
(shield) for the AEC signal cable and to the ground
return conductor(s) in the AEC signal cable.
6. Before calibrating, verify that the AEC system is CHECK:
functioning. This includes the AEC chambers /
devices and the AEC circuits in the generator. Each
of the fields on the AEC device must be able to
terminate the exposure.
7. Radiographic techniques to be performed with the
equipment (high kV chest, G.I. studies etc)?
8. Normal exposure factors used by the customer
(typical mAs / kV range)?

Table 3D-3: Precalibration checklist

3D.2.3 AEC Chamber Installation

Figure 3D-3 shows an installed AEC chamber. Note particularly the use of a suitable insulating material to
isolate the body of the chamber from the receptor ground. This is required for non-insulated AEC chambers.

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-7


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.2.3 AEC Chamber Installation (Cont)

Figure 3D-3: AEC chamber installation

Page 3D-8 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.2.4 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers)

The AEC board shown below is compatible with various makes / models of solid-state chambers (i.e.
Comet, Ziehm, Gilardoni). This AEC board is used in various models of generators requiring those AEC
chamber types.
This board will be fitted with 6 pin circular connectors (J1 to J4) or with 5 pin in-line connectors (J11
to J14), depending on the application.

R1
J1

DS1

R2 JW2
J2

DS2

J5
J3

JW3

R3
DS3
J4

JW4
R4
DS5 J6
TP2 TP4
DS4
TP1 TP3 TP5

FILE: ML_SSBRD.CDR

Figure 3D-4: Dedicated solid state AEC board (assembly 733347)

AEC board input assignment:


• Ch 1 = J1 / J11 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
• Ch 2 = J2 / J12 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
• Ch 3 = J3 / J13 - Spot Film Device.
• Ch 4 = J4 / J14 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc).

The following potentiometers are used for AEC gain adjustment:


• R1 is used for channel 1 gain adjustment.
• R2 is used for channel 2 gain adjustment.
• R3 is used for channel 3 gain adjustment.
• R4 is used for channel 4 gain adjustment.

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-9


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.2.4 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers) Cont

Tables 3D-4 and 3D-5 show the pin outs for both the 6 pin circular connectors and for the 5 pin in-line
connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-4.

FUNCTION PIN
Anode 1 NOTE: PINS 1, 2, AND 3 ON THE
Anode 2 CIRCULAR CONNECTOR ARE
Anode 3 ALL CONNECTED IN PARALLEL.
Cathode, left 4
Cathode, right 5
Cathode, middle 6
Ground Connector shell
Table 3D-4: Pin outs for 6 pin circular connector J1 to J4

FUNCTION PIN
Anode 2
Cathode, left 3
Cathode, right 5
Cathode, middle 4
Ground 1
Table 3D-5: Pin outs for 5 pin in-line connector J11 to J14

If the AEC input signal has excessive electrical noise superimposed on the signal, it is suggested that
jumpers JW1 to JW4 as appropriate be temporarily installed. If this improves the signal to noise ratio, the
jumper(s) should be left in. Excessive signal to noise ratio generally shows up as inconsistent AEC exposure
times at low mAs values.
It is the responsibility of the installer to determine the need for these jumper(s).

Page 3D-10 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.2.5 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers)

The AEC board shown below is compatible with various makes / models of solid-state chambers (i.e.
Comet, Ziehm, Gilardoni). This AEC board is used in various models of generators requiring those AEC
chamber types.
This board will be fitted with 10 pin circular connectors (J1 to J4) or with 7 pin in-line connectors
(J11 to J14), depending on the application.

Figure 3D-5: Dedicated solid-state AEC board (assembly 737992)

NOTE: WHEN PERFORMING THE INITIAL AEC SETUP (CHAPTER 3C), THE CHAMBER TYPE MUST BE SET
TO ION FOR THIS BOARD.

AEC board input assignment:


• Ch 1 = J1 / J11 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
• Ch 2 = J2 / J12 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
• Ch 3 = J3 / J13 - Spot Film Device.
• Ch 4 = J4 / J14 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc).

The following potentiometers are used for AEC gain adjustment:


• R1 is used for channel 1 gain adjustment.
• R2 is used for channel 2 gain adjustment.
• R3 is used for channel 3 gain adjustment.
• R4 is used for channel 4 gain adjustment.

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-11


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.2.5 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers) Cont

Tables 3D-6 and 3D-7 show the pin outs for both the 10 pin circular connectors and for the 7 pin in-line
connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-5.

FUNCTION PIN
Anode, left (refer to note below) 3
Cathode, left (refer to note below) 4
Anode, middle 1
Cathode, middle 6
Anode, right (refer to note below) 2
Cathode, right (refer to note below) 5
Ground Connector shell
Table 3D-6: Pin outs for 10 pin circular connector J1 to J4

FUNCTION PIN
Anode, left (refer to note below) 1
Cathode, left (refer to note below) 2
Anode, middle 3
Cathode, middle 4
Anode, right (refer to note below) 5
Cathode, right (refer to note below) 6
Ground 7
Table 3D-7: Pin outs for 7 pin in-line connector J11 to J14

NOTE:
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields from J1 to J4 and J11 to J14 as per the table below.
CHANNEL LEFT / RIGHT FIELDS AS PER LEFT / RIGHT FIELDS SWAPPED RELATIVE
TABLES 3D-6, 3D-7 TO TABLES 3D-6, 3D-7
1 Jumper JW1, JW2 pins 1-2 (N) Jumper JW1, JW2 pins 2-3 (R)
2 Jumper JW3, JW4 pins 1-2 (N) Jumper JW3, JW4 pins 2-3 (R)
3 Jumper JW5, JW6 pins 1-2 (N) Jumper JW5, JW6 pins 2-3 (R)
4 Jumper JW7, JW8 pins 1-2 (N) Jumper JW7, JW8 pins 2-3 (R)

Page 3D-12 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.2.6 AEC Board (Ion Chambers)

The AEC board shown below is compatible with various makes / models of ion chambers (i.e. AID, GE,
Vacutec, etc). This AEC board is used in various models of generators requiring those AEC chamber types.
This board will be fitted with 9 pin D connectors (J11 to J14), or with 12 pin in-line connectors (J1 to
J4), depending on the application.
CPI CANADA INC Made in Canada
AEC DEDICATED ION CHAMBER R79

J14

JW2 JW1 J5
J4
J13

JW4 JW3
J3
J12

JW6 JW5
J2
J11
R11 R12 R13 R14

JW8 JW7
J1 R1 R2 R3 R4

ML_IONBD.CDR

Figure 3D-6: Dedicated ion chamber AEC board (assembly 734614)

AEC board input assignment:


• Ch 1 = J1 / J11 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
• Ch 2 = J2 / J12 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
• Ch 3 = J3 / J13 - Spot Film Device.
• Ch 4 = J4 / J14 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc).

The following potentiometers are used for AEC gain adjustment:


• R1 is used for channel 1 gain adjustment.
• R2 is used for channel 2 gain adjustment.
• R3 is used for channel 3 gain adjustment.
• R4 is used for channel 4 gain adjustment.

The following potentiometers are used for short AEC exposure time compensation:
• R11 is used for channel 1 short exposure time compensation.
• R12 is used for channel 2 short exposure time compensation.
• R13 is used for channel 3 short exposure time compensation.
• R14 is used for channel 4 short exposure time compensation.

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-13


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.2.6 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) Cont

R79 adjusts the output of the high voltage bias supply. This is only fitted on versions of this board intended
for use with ion chambers that require a separate high voltage bias supply. R79 adjusts the value of the
+300 / +500 VDC, and the +45 VDC outputs, and should be set as per the ion chamber manufacturer
specifications.

Tables 3D-8 and 3D-9 show the pin outs for both the 9 pin D connectors and for the 12 pin in-line
connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-6. The 9 pin connectors are compatible with most models of AID
ionization chambers. However, the installer should verify compatibility of the pin outs with the chamber(s)
being used.

FUNCTION PIN NOTE


+300 VDC output 1 Only provided on configurations of this board that
require the +300 VDC output.
Right field select (refer to note below) 2
Middle field select 3
Start command output 4
Signal input 5
Left field select (refer to note below) 6
-12 VDC output 7
+12 VDC output 8
Ground 9
Table 3D-8: Pin outs for 9 pin D connector (J11 to J14)

NOTE:
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J11 to J14 as per the table below.
CHANNEL LEFT / RIGHT FIELDS AS PER LEFT / RIGHT FIELDS SWAPPED RELATIVE
TABLE 3D-8 TO TABLE 3D-8
1 Jumper JW7, JW8 pins 1-2 Jumper JW7, JW8 pins 2-3
2 Jumper JW5, JW6 pins 1-2 Jumper JW5, JW6 pins 2-3
3 Jumper JW3, JW4 pins 1-2 Jumper JW3, JW4 pins 2-3
4 Jumper JW1, JW2 pins 1-2 Jumper JW1, JW2 pins 2-3

FUNCTION PIN NOTE


+500 VDC output 1 The +500, + or -300, and +45 VDC outputs are
+ or - 300 VDC output 2 only provided on configurations of this board
+45 VDC output 3 designed to interface to ion chambers requiring
+12 VDC output 4 these voltage outputs.
-12 VDC output 5
-24 VDC output 6 +12, -12, -24 VDC outputs are typically used as
Ground 7 the DC supply for a pre-amplifier, often part of
Start command output 8 the ion chamber. -24 VDC is not available on
Left field select 9 CMP 200.
Middle field select 10
Right field select 11
Signal input 12
Table 3D-9: Pin outs for 12 pin in-line connector (J1 to J4)

Page 3D-14 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.2.7 AEC Board (Ion Chambers)

The AEC board shown below is compatible with most models of AID ion chambers. This board is fitted with
9 pin D connectors J1 to J4.

Figure 3D-7: Dedicated ion chamber AEC board (assembly 737998)

AEC board input assignment:


• Ch 1 = J1 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
• Ch 2 = J2 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
• Ch 3 = J3 - Spot Film Device.
• Ch 4 = J4 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc).

The following potentiometers are used for AEC gain adjustment:


• R11 is used for channel 1 gain adjustment.
• R12 is used for channel 2 gain adjustment.
• R13 is used for channel 3 gain adjustment.
• R14 is used for channel 4 gain adjustment.

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-15


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.2.7 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) Cont

Table 3D-10 shows the pin outs for the 9 pin D connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-7. The 9 pin
connectors are compatible with most models of AID ionization chambers. However, the installer should
verify compatibility of the pin outs with the chamber(s) being used.

FUNCTION PIN NOTE


Not used 1
Right field select (refer to note below) 2 See note below.
Middle field select 3
Start command output 4
Signal input 5
Left field select (refer to note below) 6 See note below.
-12 VDC output 7
+12 VDC output 8
Ground 9
Table 3D-10: Pin outs for 9 pin D connector (J1 to J4)

NOTE:
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J1 to J4 as per the table below.
CHANNEL LEFT / RIGHT FIELDS AS PER LEFT / RIGHT FIELDS SWAPPED RELATIVE
TABLE 3D-10 TO TABLE 3D-10
1 Jumper JW7, JW8 pins 1-2 (N) Jumper JW7, JW8 pins 2-3 (R)
2 Jumper JW5, JW6 pins 1-2 (N) Jumper JW5, JW6 pins 2-3 (R)
3 Jumper JW3, JW4 pins 1-2 (N) Jumper JW3, JW4 pins 2-3 (R)
4 Jumper JW1, JW2 pins 1-2 (N) Jumper JW1, JW2 pins 2-3 (R)

Page 3D-16 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.2.8 Precalibration Notes

Please note the following points before beginning AEC calibration.

CAUTION: THE PROCEDURES IN THESE SECTIONS REQUIRE X-RAY EXPOSURES. TAKE ALL
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.

SHOULD AN IMPROPER TECHNIQUE BE SELECTED, OR AN AEC FAULT OCCUR CAUSING NO


AEC FEEDBACK SIGNAL TO THE GENERATOR, THE EXPOSURE WILL TERMINATE AND AN “AEC
DEVICE ERROR” MESSAGE WILL BE DISPLAYED IF THE RAMP VOLTAGE FAILS TO REACH 4% OF
THE EXPECTED RAMP VOLTAGE WHEN THE EXPOSURE TIME REACHES 20% OF THE SELECTED
BACK UP TIME.

• All setup functions per the preceding sections must be completed before beginning AEC calibration.
• The generator must be known to be calibrated before beginning AEC calibration.
• All components (X-ray tubes, collimators, AEC chambers, etc) used during AEC calibration must be
those that will be used during procedures, and must be positioned as they will be in actual use of
the X-ray room.
• During AEC calibration, always ensure that the central ray is centered relative to the image receptor.
• Before placing the absorbers, ensure that the collimator is opened sufficiently to irradiate ALL fields
on the AEC pickup device.
• Ensure that the absorber is positioned to fully cover the X-ray field. The absorber must extend a
minimum of 3/8 in. (10 mm) beyond the X-ray field.
• During AEC calibration, all AEC exposures should be done using mA values such that the
exposures are in the 30 to 100 ms range UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE.
• The recommended absorber is water. This should be in a plastic container of uniform thickness.
Lexan of a similar thickness is also a suitable absorber.
• During AEC calibration, if exposure times do not change if the mA is varied, it may be that
the input signal level to the AEC board is too high. If this is experienced, check the ramp
voltage at the output of the first gain stage (the first operational amplifier output) on the AEC
board for the subject AEC channel. This voltage must never exceed 10 V. If this voltage does
exceed 10 V, reduce the input signal level as required.

3D.2.9 Required Test Equipment

The following test equipment is required for AEC calibration.


• Lexan or equivalent (or water) absorbers in various thicknesses. Water should be in a plastic container
of uniform thickness.
• A supply of film in each film speed that will be calibrated.
• A cassette with intensifying screen in each speed that will be calibrated.

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-17


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.3.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY)

CTM

O.T.

WALL
BUCKY Absorber

SID
40 in(100cm)

Grid
AEC
Chamber
BUCKY
Cassette Tray

FILE: ML_IMREC

TYPICAL TABLE BUCKY IMAGE RECEPTOR

Figure 3D-8: Equipment setup for table Bucky AEC calibration

The AEC CALIBRATION menus that relate to kV breakpoint calibration for the membrane console are
shown below.
* AEC CALIBRATION *
FILM SCREEN 1 DENSITY SETUP
FILM SCREEN 2
FILM SCREEN 3

EXIT

Page 3D-18 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.3.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont

* AEC CAL, F/S1 *


50KV: 84.0 85KV: 42.8
55KV: 78.0 95KV: 38.0
65KV: 66.0 +
75KV: 54.0 -

<< >>

* AEC CAL, F/S1 *


110KV: 34.0
130KV: 28.0
+
-

<<

Figure 3D-9: GenWare® AEC Setup & Calibration window, Film Screen Cal. tab

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-19


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.3.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont

Use these steps to perform the table Bucky AEC calibration.


Step Action
IF THE AEC BOARD BEING CALIBRATED HAS SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION
POTENTIOMETERS, THE SHORT EXPOSURE TIME COMPENSATION MUST FIRST BE
DISABLED.
TO DO THIS, ADJUST ALL SHORT AEC EXPOSURE TIME COMPENSATION POTS TO
ZERO BY TURNING EACH OF THESE POTENTIOMETERS FULLY CLOCKWISE. THESE
ARE MULTI-TURN POTENTIOMETERS, AND MUST BE TURNED BY AS MUCH AS 25
TURNS TO REACH THE ZERO-OHMS LIMIT.
FAILURE TO PRESET THESE POTS WILL RESULT IN DIFFICULTY IN PERFORMING
AEC CALIBRATION.
1. Set up the X-ray tube stand as shown in figure 3D-8.
2. Align the tube stand and table Bucky such that the central ray is centered relative to the image
receptor.
3. Open up the collimator to expose all three fields of the AEC pickup. Ensure that the central ray
remains centered relative to the image receptor.
4. Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-12) in the X-ray field,
ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber.
Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)
5. Ensure that in the RECEPTOR SETUP Ensure that in the Receptor Setup window,
menu, each receptor has the desired AEC each receptor has the desired AEC channel
channel assigned to it. Refer to RECEPTOR assigned to it. Refer to RECEPTOR SETUP
SETUP in chapter 3C. in chapter 3C.
6. In the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, set In the Receptor Setup window, under the
MEMORY to NO for each image receptor. Receptor Properties tab, set Memory to off
This will ensure that the next receptor being for each image receptor. This will ensure that
calibrated will not remember the techniques the next receptor being calibrated will not
from the previous receptor. remember the techniques from the previous
The MEMORY function may be reset as receptor.
desired after AEC calibration is completed. The Memory function may be reset as
desired after AEC calibration is completed.
7. In the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, ensure that In the Receptor Setup window, under the
the AEC BACKUP MAS and AEC BACKUP AEC tab, ensure that the AEC Back-Up mAs
MS are set sufficiently high that the generator and AEC Back-Up ms are set sufficiently
backup timer will not terminate the exposure. high that the generator backup timer will not
terminate the exposure
8. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, Reselect the AEC Setup & Calibration
select AEC CALIBRATION. window.
9. From the AEC CALIBRATION menu, select On the main AEC Calibration window, select
FILM SCREEN 1 (the slowest film screen Film Screen 1 (the slowest film screen
combination). combination). This will only be available if
Media was set to Film in the AEC Setup tab.

Page 3D-20 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.3.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont

CAUTION: DURING THE FOLLOWING CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, BE SURE THAT THE SELECTED
TECHNIQUES WILL NOT OVERLOAD THE X-RAY TUBE. USE CAUTION WHEN REPEATING
EXPOSURES AS THIS MAY QUICKLY OVERLOAD THE X-RAY TUBE. MOST X-RAY TUBE
MANUFACTURERS RECOMMEND NO MORE THAN TWO HIGH SPEED STARTS PER
MINUTE.

NOTE: BE SURE TO USE THE SAME CASSETTE FOR EACH EXPOSURE AT THAT FILM SPEED.

FILM SPEED mAs @ 75 kV


100 16
200 8
400 4
800 2

Table 3D-11: Film speed vs. mAs @ 75 kV

The mAs values noted in the above table represent the approximate desired mAs at an SID of 40 in. (100
cm), using a grid with a 12:1 ratio. All measurements were done with HVL = 3 mm Al @ 75 kV.

Step Action
10. Select the table Bucky image receptor.
Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)
11. Select the Film Screen Cal. tab.
12. Select the 75KV breakpoint. Use the + or – Enter the value 45 into the 75 kV dialog box,
buttons to enter the value 45. under Film Screen Cal.
13. Select the appropriate mA for the first film speed being calibrated per table 3D-12,
remembering that the slowest film screen used in that installation must be calibrated first
(example 320 mA for 100 speed film). Select large focus, center field.
14. Make an exposure and note the mAs.
15. Referring to table 3D-11, select the target mAs required for the film speed being calibrated i.e.
approximately 16 mAs at the 75 kV knee breakpoint for 100 speed film.
16. Adjust the required gain potentiometer on the AEC board while taking exposures until the mAs
noted in the previous step is obtained.
17. Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique as in the previous step, expose the film and develop it.
18. Measure the optical density. The desired value should have been previously recorded in a
copy of table 3D-1.
19. If the measured O.D. is not within the desired value, adjust the gain pot (as per step 16) to
increase or decrease the density, and then repeat the previous two steps.

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-21


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.3.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont

Step Action
20. Once the desired film density is achieved, record the mAs, calibration number, and O.D. in a
copy of table 3D-13.
21. Vary the absorber thickness, and confirm that the mAs changes accordingly.
STEPS 22 TO 25 APPLY TO SOLID-STATE AEC CHAMBERS ONLY
22. Measure the mAs with the center AEC field only selected. Record this value.
23. Select the left field, and measure the mAs. Compare this value to the value noted for the
center field.
24. If the field balance is not acceptable, adjust the left field compensation value up or down as
described in the section AEC Setup in chapter 3C such that the left field matches the center
field.
Do not adjust the center field (C) compensation value.
25. Repeat steps 23 and 24 for the right field.

For each breakpoint in the remainder of this section, start with the approximate mAs as per table 3D-12.
After that mAs is achieved, a film must be exposed and the O.D. verified. If the O.D. is not the desired value,
further iterations may be required to achieve the desired optical density.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT AFTER THE 75KV BREAKPOINT IS
CALIBRATED. FURTHER DENSITY ADJUSTMENTS WILL ONLY BE MADE BY ADJUSTING THE
CALIBRATION VALUES FOR THE OTHER KV BREAKPOINTS.

Step Action
26. Change the absorber thickness as specified for the 55 kV breakpoint in table 3D-12. As
before, ensure that the absorber fully blocks the X-ray field.
Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)
27. In the following steps, you will need to scroll
back and forth between AEC CAL menu 1
and AEC CAL menu 2 using the >> and <<
buttons in order to access the required
breakpoints.
28. Select the 55KV breakpoint. Click in the 55 kV dialog box, under Film
Screen Cal. This will set the generator kV
demand to 55 kV.
29. Make an exposure and note the mAs. Use Make an exposure and note the mAs. Use
mA values as specified for the 55 kV mA values as specified for the 55 kV
breakpoint in table 3D-12. breakpoint in table 3D-12.

Page 3D-22 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.3.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont

Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)


30. Adjust the 55 kV calibration number using the Adjust the 55 kV calibration number such that
+ or - buttons such that the actual mAs is the actual mAs is equal to the target mAs at
equal to the target mAs at 55 kV as per table 55 kV as per table 3D-12.
3D-12. DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT.
GAIN POT.
31. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique, expose the film and develop it.
32. Measure the optical density. The optical density should be as per step 18.
33. If the measured O.D. is not the desired value, readjust the 55 kV calibration number, then
repeat the previous two steps.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT.
34. Once the desired film density is achieved, record the required values in a copy of table 3D-13.

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-23


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.3.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont

100 speed film screen


Break point Absorber mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
75 kV knee pt. 20 cm H2O 16 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
55 kV 15 cm H2O 25 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
50 kV 15 cm H2O 40 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
65 kV 15 cm H2O 10 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
110 kV 25 cm H2O 6.3 mAs 200 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
130 kV 25 cm H2O 5 mAs 200 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
85 kV 20 cm H2O 10 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
95 kV 20 cm H2O 5 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)

200 speed film screen


Break point Absorber mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
75 kVp knee pt. 20 cm H2O 8 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
55 kVp 15 cm H2O 12.5 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
50 kVp 15 cm H2O 20 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
65 kVp 15 cm H2O 5 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
110 kVp 25 cm H2O 3.2 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
130 kVp 25 cm H2O 2.5 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
85 kVp 20 cm H2O 5 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
95 kVp 20 cm H2O 2.5 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)

400 speed film screen


Break Point Absorber mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
75 kVp knee pt. 20 cm H2O 4 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
55 kVp 15 cm H2O 6.3 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
50 kVp 15 cm H2O 10 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
65 kVp 15 cm H2O 2.5 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
110 kVp 25 cm H2O 1.6 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
130 kVp 25 cm H2O 1.25 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
85 kVp 20 cm H2O 2.5 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
95 kVp 20 cm H2O 1.25 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)

800 speed film screen


Break Point Absorber mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
75 kVp knee pt. 20 cm H2O 2 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
55 kVp 15 cm H2O 3.2 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
50 kVp 15 cm H2O 5 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
65 kVp 15 cm H2O 1.25 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
110 kVp 25 cm H2O 0.8 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
130 kVp 25 cm H2O 0.63 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
85 kVp 20 cm H2O 1.25 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
95 kVp 20 cm H2O 0.63 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)

Table 3D-12: Target breakpoint calibration factors

Page 3D-24 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.3.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont

2
NOTE: For SID’s other than 40 in. (100 cm) multiply the mAs by the factor [new SID / 40 in. (100 cm)] .

Record the final measurements in a copy of the table below. The final measurements are those obtained
AFTER films have been developed to verify the correct O.D. at each breakpoint.

FILM SCREEN 1 SPEED =


#1 BK. POINT = 75 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#2 BK. POINT = 55 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#3 BK. POINT = 50 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#4 BK. POINT = 65 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#5 BK. POINT = 110 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#6 BK. POINT = 130 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#7 BK. POINT = 85 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#8 BK. POINT = 95 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =

FILM SCREEN 1 SPEED =


#1 BK. POINT = 75 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#2 BK. POINT = 55 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#3 BK. POINT = 50 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#4 BK. POINT = 65 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#5 BK. POINT = 110 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#6 BK. POINT = 130 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#7 BK. POINT = 85 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#8 BK. POINT = 95 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =

FILM SCREEN 1 SPEED =


#1 BK. POINT = 75 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#2 BK. POINT = 55 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#3 BK. POINT = 50 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#4 BK. POINT = 65 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#5 BK. POINT = 110 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#6 BK. POINT = 130 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#7 BK. POINT = 85 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =
#8 BK. POINT = 95 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =

Table 3D-13: Breakpoint calibration worksheet

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-25


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.3.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont

Step Action
35. Repeat steps 26 to 34 for the remaining breakpoints: 50 kV, 65 kV, 110 kV, 130 kV, 85 kV,
and 95 kV. Do the breakpoint calibration in the stated order.
The 50 kV and 130 kV breakpoints only need to be calibrated if these kV ranges are
used with AEC. Refer to the comments below.
50 kV: At approximately 50 kV and under, the film screen sensitivity becomes too low for
practical AEC operation when used with a Bucky. Unless special techniques are used
which require the 50 kV range, simply enter the 55 kV calibration number into the 50
kV breakpoint.
130 kV: Unless special high kV techniques are used which require the 130 kV range, simply
enter the 110 kV calibration number into the 130 kV breakpoint.
36. Repeat steps 9 to 35 for FILM SCREEN 2, except:
1. Film screen 2 must be the next highest film speed after film screen 1.
2. When calibrating the 75 kV breakpoint for film screen 2, DO NOT adjust the AEC
board gain pot. Dose adjustments for film screen 2 at 75 kV must only be made
by varying the 75 kV breakpoint calibration numbers.
37. Repeat steps 9 to 35 for FILM SCREEN 3, except:
1. Film screen 3 must be the highest film speed.
2. When calibrating the 75 kV breakpoint for film screen 3, DO NOT adjust the AEC
board gain pot. Dose adjustments for film screen 3 at 75 kV must only be made
by varying the 75 kV breakpoint calibration numbers.
Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)
38. Select << to return to the AEC
CALIBRATION menu.

3D.4.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION

Use these steps to perform the short AEC exposure time compensation.
Step Action
THESE STEPS ONLY APPLY IF AEC EXPOSURES LESS THAN APPROXIMATELY 15
MS ARE REQUIRED AND THE AEC BOARD HAS SHORT AEC TIME ADJUSTMENT
POTENTIOMETERS.
1. Select the image receptor to be short AEC time compensated, i.e. table Bucky.
2. Select the highest film speed used on the selected receptor, and then select 75 kV.
3. Set the mA per table 3D-12 for the film speed being used. Reinstall the absorber as per table
3D-12 for the 75 kV breakpoint.
4. Make an exposure and confirm the mAs readings as previously recorded in table 3D-13.
5. Increase the mA such as to decrease the AEC exposure time to approximately 10 ms.
6. Adjust the short AEC time compensation pot for the AEC channel being calibrated such that
the mAs is approximately the same as previously recorded (step 4).
7. Increase the mA again such as to decrease the AEC exposure time to approximately 6 ms
(but not less).

Page 3D-26 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.4.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (Cont)

Step Action
8. Adjust the short AEC time compensation pot for the AEC channel being calibrated such that
the mAs is approximately the same as it was in step 6.
9. The short AEC time compensation adjustments affect the AEC calibration at longer exposure
times. Therefore, it may now be necessary to readjust the gain pot (at 75 kV) for the AEC
channel being calibrated to restore the mAs values to the values previously recorded in table
3D-13. Ensure that the absorber thickness and mA values are as per table 3D-12 when
readjusting the AEC gain pot.
10. Using 75 kV exposures, films should be exposed and developed, and the O.D. checked at
AEC exposure times of approximately 6 ms and approximately 100 ms. If the film density is
not acceptable at both short and long AEC exposure times, it will be necessary to iterate the
adjustments of both the short AEC time compensation pot and the AEC gain pot by repeating
steps 3 to 8.
11. Repeat steps 1 to 10 for each image receptor (AEC channel) to be short AEC time
compensated.

3D.5.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION

The DENS. SETUP menus for the membrane console are shown below.
* DENS. SETUP *
-8: ---
-7: ---
-6: --- +
-5: 62% -

EXIT >>

* DENS. SETUP *
-4: 50%
-3: 37%
-2: 25% +
-1: 12% -

<< >>

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-27


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.5.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION (Cont)

* DENS. SETUP *
+1: 12%
+2: 25%
+3: 37% +
+4: 50% -

<< >>

* DENS. SETUP *
+5: 62%
+6: ---
+7: --- +
+8: --- -

<< >>

Page 3D-28 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.5.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION (Cont)

Figure 3D-10: GenWare® AEC Setup & Calibration window, Density tab

Please note the following points regarding density calibration:


• Up to eight density plus and eight density minus steps are available. If ± 8 density steps are not
required, the unwanted density steps may be programmed out per the procedure below. For example, if
only ± 5 density steps are desired, then density steps ± 6, 7, 8 may be deprogrammed.
• Once the desired number of ± density steps are known, the relative minimum and maximum mAs values
must be determined. Typically, the minimum density step will result in half (50%) of the nominal mAs
(dose) and the maximum density step will typically give double (100% increase) the nominal mAs
(dose). The nominal mAs is the value that was recorded at 0 density in table 3D-13.
• The relative mAs change per density step must be determined next. To do this, note the relative
minimum and maximum mAs as determined above (i.e. 50% at min density and 100% increase at max
density), then calculate the number of - density steps and the number of + density steps that will be
required.
The relative mAs change between density steps will then be the minimum density (i.e. 50) divided
by the number of density minus steps or the maximum density (i.e. 100) divided by the number of
density plus steps. This will yield the required mAs increment for each density minus step and for each
density plus step respectively.
For ± 8 density steps, this gives a mAs decrease of 6.25% per density minus step (8 steps x 6.25%
per step = 50% mAs at -8 density) or a mAs increase of 12.5% per density plus step (8 steps x 12.5%
per step = 100% mAs increase at +8 density).

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-29


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.5.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION (Cont)

Refer to table 3D-14 for two typical examples of density steps vs. calibration numbers. For 8 minus
density steps the mAs decrease is 6.25% per step, and for 8 + density steps the mAs increase is 12.5%
per step as per the example calculation above.
For 5 minus density steps the mAs decrease is 10% per step, and for 5 + density steps the mAs
increase is 20% per step.

DENSITY CALIBRATION NUMBER (- 8 DENSITY CALIBRATION NUMBER (- 5


STEP DENSITY = HALF THE DOSE, +8 STEP DENSITY = HALF THE DOSE, +5
DENSITY = DOUBLE THE DOSE) DENSITY = DOUBLE THE DOSE)
-8 50
-7 44
-6 38
-5 31 -5 50
-4 25 -4 40
-3 19 -3 30
-2 13 -2 20
-1 6 -1 10
0 DENSITY: SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
+1 13 +1 20
+2 25 +2 40
+3 38 +3 60
+4 50 +4 80
+5 63 +5 99
+6 75
+7 88
+8 99

Table 3D-14: Example density values

Page 3D-30 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.5.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION (Cont)

Use these steps to perform AEC density calibration.


Step Action
1. Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-12 in the X-ray field,
ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber.
Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)
2. Select DENSITY SETUP. Select the Density tab.
3. Select 75 kV via the console. Select 75 kV via GenWare®.
4. Referring to table 3D-13, note the mAs at 75 Referring to table 3D-13, note the mAs at 75
kV for film screen 1. This is the mAs required kV for film screen 1. This is the mAs required
to achieve 0 density. to achieve 0 density.
5. Determine the highest density minus step to Determine the highest density minus step to
be used. If there will be unused density steps, be used. If there will be unused density steps,
i.e. –8, -7, -6, these density steps must be i.e. –8, -7, -6, these density steps must be
disabled by setting them to --. This is done by disabled by setting them to 0.
using the – button to scroll down until the --
symbol is displayed.
6. Select the highest density minus step that will For the highest density minus step that will be
be used, i.e. –5. Use the + or – buttons to set used, i.e. –5, enter the desired relative
the calibration number for that step to the density value (example 50, this will give
desired relative density value (example 50, approximately 1/2 the density).
this will give approximately 1/2 the density).
7. Make an exposure and confirm that the Make an exposure and confirm that the
measured mAs is approximately the desired measured mAs is approximately the desired
value. value.
8. If the measured mAs is not as expected, If the measured mAs is not as expected,
adjust the calibration number and repeat the adjust the calibration number and repeat the
previous step. previous step.
9. In the following steps, you will need to scroll
back and forth between the DENS. SETUP
menus using the >> and << buttons in order
to access the required density steps.
10. Select the next density step (i.e. - 4) and Select the next density step (i.e. - 4) and
enter the appropriate calibration number for enter the appropriate calibration number for
that step. Then repeat steps 7 and 8. that step. Then repeat steps 7 and 8.
11. Repeat the previous step for each remaining Repeat the previous step for each remaining
density minus step. density minus step.
12. Determine the highest density plus step to be Determine the highest density plus step to be
used. If there will be unused density steps, used. If there will be unused density steps,
i.e. +8, +7, +6, these density steps must be i.e. +8, +7, +6, these density steps must be
disabled by setting them to --. This is done by disabled by setting them to 0.
using the – button to scroll down until the --
symbol is displayed.

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-31


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.5.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION (Cont)

Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)


13. Select the highest density plus step that will For the highest density plus step that will be
be used, i.e. +5. Use the + or – buttons to set used, i.e. +5, enter the desired relative
the calibration number for that step to the density value (example 99, this will give
desired relative density value (example 99, approximately double the density).
this will give approximately double the
density).
14. Make an exposure and confirm that the Make an exposure and confirm that the
measured mAs is approximately the desired measured mAs is approximately the desired
value. value.
15. If the measured mAs is not as expected, If the measured mAs is not as expected,
adjust the calibration number and repeat the adjust the calibration number and repeat the
previous step. previous step.
16. Select the next lowest density step (i.e. +4) Select the next lowest density step (i.e. +4)
and enter the appropriate calibration number and enter the appropriate calibration number
for that step. Then repeat steps 14 and 15. for that step. Then repeat steps 14 and 15.
17. Repeat the previous step for each remaining Repeat the previous step for each remaining
density plus step. density plus step.
18. Press << or RETURN as required to return to
the AEC CALIBRATION menu.

Page 3D-32 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY)

CTM

WALL
BUCKY Absorber

O.T.

FRONT VIEW OF
WALL BUCKY

72 in(180cm)

TYPICAL WALL BUCKY IMAGE RECEPTOR

Figure 3D-11: Equipment setup for wall Bucky AEC calibration

Please note the following points regarding wall Bucky calibration:


• If the wall Bucky is dedicated to chest radiography, a focused grid with a 10:1 or 12:1 ratio should be
used along with an SID of 72 in. (180 cm).
• If the wall Bucky will be used for conventional as well as chest radiography, then two grids should ideally
be used. See the note at the bottom of this page.
A reasonable compromise if a single grid must be used is a 10:1 ratio, 60 in. (150 cm) grid.

NOTE: SINCE MOST WALL BUCKYS ARE USED AT 40 AND 72 IN. (100 AND 180 CM) SID, THE GRID
MUST BE CHOSEN WITH CARE WITH RESPECT TO CUT-OFF.
A TYPICAL GRID WILL HAVE AN 8:1 RATIO, WITH 85 LINE PAIR / INCH OR 10:1 RATIO WITH
150 LINE PAIR / INCH (STATIONARY).
TYPICALLY, 400 SPEED FILM SCREEN WILL BE USED WITH 90 SECOND PROCESSING.

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-33


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) Cont

Grid Absorption

The following information may aid in selecting a grid and / or estimating mAs if required: The percentages
listed are approximate.

A 10:1 ratio 60 in. (150 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13 cm)
from center:
At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 18%
At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption = 40%

A 12:1 ratio 60 in. (150 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13 cm)
from center:
At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 20%
At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption = 50%

A 10:1 ratio 72 in. (180 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13 cm)
from center:
At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption = 65%

A 12:1 ratio 72 in. (180 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13 cm)
from center:
At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption = 75%

A 10:1 ratio 40 in. (100 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13 cm)
from center:
At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 65%

A 12:1 ratio 40 in. (100 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13 cm)
from center:
At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 75%

NOTE: BREAKPOINT CALIBRATIONS MAY PREVIOUSLY HAVE BEEN DONE FOR ALL THREE FILM
SCREEN COMBINATIONS DURING TABLE BUCKY AEC CALIBRATION. IF SO, THE REMAINING
IMAGE RECEPTORS MUST USE THE CALIBRATION CURVES PREVIOUSLY ESTABLISHED FOR
THOSE FILM SCREENS.
IF A SPARE FILM SCREEN COMBINATION IS AVAILABLE FOR WALL BUCKY USE, IT IS
SUGGESTED THAT TWO RECEPTOR SELECTOR BUTTONS ON THE CONSOLE BE ASSIGNED TO
SELECT THE WALL BUCKY. THE FIRST WALL BUCKY SELECTOR SHOULD BE USED FOR 40 IN.
(100 CM) SID’S WITH THE APPROPRIATE PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED FILM SCREEN. THE SECOND
WALL BUCKY SELECTOR SHOULD THEN BE USED WITH THE SPARE FILM SCREEN AT 72 IN. (180
CM) SID’S.
THIS METHOD WILL ALLOW THE GRID TO BE OPTIMIZED FOR EACH SID, AS A SEPARATE
DEDICATED FILM SCREEN WITH ITS OWN CALIBRATION CURVE CAN BE ASSIGNED TO THE 72
IN. (180CM) SID.

Page 3D-34 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) Cont

Use these steps to perform the wall Bucky AEC calibration.


Step Action
Steps 1 to 15 apply only if using one receptor select button for both SID’s, using
previously calibrated film screens.
1. Set up the X-ray tube stand as shown in figure 3D-11.
2. Align the tube stand and wall Bucky such that the central ray is centered relative to the image
receptor.
3. Open up the collimator to expose all three fields of the AEC pickup. Ensure that the central ray
remains centered relative to the image receptor.
4. Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-12) in the X-ray field,
ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber.
5. Select the wall Bucky image receptor.
6. Select the slowest film screen used for the wall Bucky, then select the appropriate mA for that
film screen per table 3D-12 (example 320 mA for 100 speed film). Select 75 kV, large focus,
center field.
7. Make an exposure and note the mAs.
8. Referring to table 3D-13, note the previously established mAs at the 75 kV breakpoint for the
film speed being calibrated.
9. Adjust the gain potentiometer on the AEC board for the channel that is connected to the wall
Bucky while taking exposures until the mAs noted in the previous step is obtained.
DO NOT READJUST THE GAIN POT FOR ANY PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED CHANNELS.
10. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique as in the previous step, expose the film and develop it.
11. Measure the O.D. The desired value should have been previously recorded in a copy of table
3D-1.
12. If the measured O.D. is not the desired value, adjust the gain pot to increase or decrease the
density, then repeat the previous two steps. Do not readjust the kV breakpoints that were
previously calibrated.
13. Change the SID to 40 in. (100 cm) and repeat steps 10 to 12. Adjust the gain pot if necessary
to achieve an acceptable compromise between both SID’s.
14. Verify the O.D. at a range of different kV’s.
15. Press << as required to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.

CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11 Rev. B Page 3D-35


3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) Cont

Step Action
Steps 16 to 21 apply only if using two receptor select buttons (one for each SID), using
one previously calibrated film screen and one uncalibrated film screen.
16. Select the wall Bucky image receptor via the selector configured for the 40 in. (100 cm) SID.
17. Repeat steps 1 to 12 at the 40 in. (100 cm) SID position using the appropriate previously
calibrated film screen.
18. Verify the O.D. at a range of different kV’s.
19. Select the wall Bucky image receptor via the selector configured for the 72 in. (180 cm) SID.
20. Calibrate the film screen assigned to this SID as per the table Bucky procedure. The AEC
calibration pot must not be readjusted, as it was calibrated at the 40 in. (100 cm) SID. All
breakpoints, including the 75 kV breakpoint, are to be calibrated by adjusting the calibration
numbers ONLY.
21. Press << and EXIT as required to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.

3D.7.0 AEC CALIBRATION (MISC)

The remaining image receptors are calibrated in a similar manner to the table Bucky receptor. Only the gain
pot for that channel is to be adjusted at the slowest film screen used on that receptor. DO NOT READJUST
THE GAIN POT FOR PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED RECEPTORS, AND DO NOT READJUST THE
CALIBRATION VALUES IN THE AEC CALIBRATION MENU FOR PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED FILM
SCREENS.

THE MEMORY FUNCTION THAT WAS TEMPORARILY CHANGED TO OFF EARLIER IN THIS
CHAPTER MAY NOW BE RESET TO THE DESIRED VALUE.

Page 3D-36 Rev. B CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740987-11


CPI Canada Inc. Acceptance Testing 4

CHAPTER 4

ACCEPTANCE TESTING
CONTENTS:

4.1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 4-2


4.2.0 REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT FOR GENERATOR VERIFICATION. ....................................................... 4-2
4.3.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (BASIC FUNCTIONS) ............................................................................................. 4-3
4.3.1 Console Tests ............................................................................................................................................ 4-3
4.3.2 Low Speed Starter Verification................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.4.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (kV, TIME, mA AND mAs) ....................................................................................... 4-4
4.5.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (AEC) ....................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.6.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (HVL, LINEARITY AND REPRODUCIBILITY) ........................................................ 4-6

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-05 Rev. B Page 4-1
4 Acceptance Testing CPI Canada Inc.

4.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This section details acceptance testing, which verifies that the generator is performing within limits. It is
recommended that this be done whenever the generator is reconfigured, or component(s) are replaced
which may affect the X-ray output. Examples of such components are the X-ray tube, HT tank, console
board, generator control board, filament supply board, and the AEC board.

WARNING: 1. USE EXTREME CARE IN MEASURING HIGH VOLTAGES. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT MAY
CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH.
2. EVEN WITH THE GENERATOR SWITCHED OFF AT THE CONSOLE, MAINS VOLTAGE IS
STILL PRESENT INSIDE THE GENERATOR CABINET. THIS VOLTAGE IS EXTREMELY
DANGEROUS; USE EXTREME CAUTION.
3. THE ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS, LOCATED BESIDE THE HT TANK, PRESENT A
HAZARD FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED
OFF. VERIFY THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE SERVICING OR
TOUCHING ANY PARTS.

WARNING: THE PROCEDURES IN THIS CHAPTER REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF X-RAYS. TAKE
ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.

WARNING: 1. ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE EQUIPMENT UNDER TEST AND ALL ASSOCIATED TEST
EQUIPMENT IS PROPERLY GROUNDED.
2. ENSURE THAT THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES ARE INTACT / UNDAMAGED AND
PROPERLY CONNECTED BEFORE ATTEMPTING EXPOSURES.

ENSURE THAT THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE COMPLETED PRIOR TO PERFORMING THE
ACCEPTANCE TESTING:

• The generator is interfaced to compatible room equipment, as noted on the product description \
compatibility statement in chapter 1.
• The tube auto calibration has been done as per chapter 3C.
• The receptors have been programmed as per chapter 3C.
• If the installation has AEC, verify that all receptors have been calibrated as per chapter 3D.
• Acceptance testing shall only be started after the installation is complete i.e. with the generator in the
final position and installed as per the previous chapters of this manual.

4.2.0 REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT FOR GENERATOR VERIFICATION.

• kV measuring device such as a Dynalyzer (or equivalent).


• Storage oscilloscope.
• mA / mAs meter.
• Radiation meter 0-10 mGy (0-1000 mR).
• Lead diaphragm or equivalent to collimate the beam.
• General purpose DVM.
• Strobe or reed tachometer.
• Current probe 0 to 20 amps AC.
• A set of HVL filters.
• Calculator.

Page 4-2 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-05 Rev. B
CPI Canada Inc. Acceptance Testing 4
4.3.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (BASIC FUNCTIONS)

4.3.1 Console Tests

Step Action Result Check


1. Press the power ON then power OFF buttons
on the console. Unit switches on and off.
2. Press power ON again to switch the unit on. Unit switches on.
3. Press each of the receptor buttons that are Verify that the adjacent LED
active (those that have been enabled during lights for each receptor.
generator configuration).
Note: The technique select button used to select AEC / mAs / mA/ms in steps 4, 5, 6 will only be
functional if APR MODE has been disabled during generator configuration (the technique select function
is disabled if APR MODE is enabled). This function is described in chapter 3C, in the section UTILITY
MENU, under CONSOLE.
4. Select an active radiographic receptor that has
AEC programmed. A: The AEC LED lights.
Press the technique select button to select B: kV value is displayed.
AEC. C: mA value is displayed.
Verify the following displays: D: Density value is displayed.
5. Press the technique select button to select A: The mAs LED lights.
mAs. B: kV value is displayed.
Verify the following displays: C: mAs value is displayed.
6. Press the technique select button to select A: The mA/ms LED lights.
mA/ms. B: kV value is displayed.
Verify the following displays: C: mA value is displayed.
D: ms value is displayed.
7. Press the kV +/- buttons. kV increases if kV + is pressed.
kV decreases if kV - is pressed.
8. Ensure that three-point operation is selected
(mA/ms). mA increases if mA + is pressed.
Press the mA +/- buttons. mA decreases if mA - is pressed.
9. Ensure that three-point operation is selected
(mA/ms). ms increases if ms + is pressed.
Press the ms +/- buttons. ms decreases if ms - is pressed.
10. Press the focus select button. The large and small focal spot
LED’s alternately light as the
switch is pressed.
11. Ensure that AEC is selected. The three film-screen LED’s (I, II,
Press the film-screen select button. III) alternately light as the switch
is pressed.
12. Select 60 kV, 50 mA, 100 ms. The LED adjacent to the prep
Press the PREP button. button lights.
13. Press the X-ray button. The X-ray warning indicator
lights during an X-ray exposure,
and an audible tone is heard
from the console.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-05 Rev. B Page 4-3
4 Acceptance Testing CPI Canada Inc.

4.3.1 Console Tests (Cont)

Step Action Result Check


14. Ensure that AEC is selected. The LEFT, CENTER, and RIGHT
Press the individual AEC field select buttons in field selection LED’s should light
sequence. as each field is selected.
15. Press the power OFF button on the console. The unit switches off.

4.3.2 Low Speed Starter Verification

Step Action Result Check


1. Connect a current probe to the common lead
of the X-ray tube stator. A 60 Hz waveform dropping to
Switch ON the console. less than half amplitude after
Press and hold the PREP button. prep is complete.
2. Measure the rotor boost time. Should be approximately 1.5 sec.
3. Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify
that the tube reaches operating speed at the
end of boost. Speed ≥ 3300 RPM.
4. Switch OFF the console.

4.4.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (kV, TIME, mA AND mAs)

Note: A Dynalyzer is not recommended for mA measurements with this X-ray generator. Bandwidth
limitations of the Dynalyzer will result in inaccurate mA measurements at mA values less than
approximately 100 mA. mA measurements should be made with an mA / mAs meter connected
to the mA test jacks on the HT tank. Exposure times must be greater than 100 ms to ensure
accurate measurements.

Warning: Take all appropriate precautions when connecting the mA / mAs meter to the HT tank.
Ensure mains power is switched off and all capacitors are discharged before connecting
the meter. Use the same precautions when disconnecting the meter. The mA shorting link
must be in place on the HT tank at all times except when an approved mA / mAs meter is
connected.

Note: Test equipment tolerances must be allowed for in the measurements in the following sections.
Limits stated are the maximum allowed limits, including equipment tolerances and
measurement error.
Disregard “cable charge” spikes at the beginning of the ma waveform.

Page 4-4 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-05 Rev. B
CPI Canada Inc. Acceptance Testing 4
4.4.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (kV, TIME, mA AND mAs) Cont

Step Action Result Check


1. Set up the kV measuring device to measure N/A
kV as per the manufacturers instructions.
Connect the output of the kV measuring
device to channel 1 of the oscilloscope.
2. Set up an mA / mAs meter to measure X-ray N/A
tube current by temporarily open-circuiting the
mA measuring link E17-E18 on the HT tank.
Connect the mA / mAs meter to these
terminals, following the device manufacturers
instructions.
Connect the output of the mA / mAs meter to
channel 2 of the oscilloscope.

IF HIGH kV EXPOSURES ARE NOT ALLOWED IN THE FOLLOWING STEPS, CHECK THE MAXIMUM kV
SETTING THAT HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED. REFER TO “TUBE SELECTION” IN CHAPTER 3.
Step Action Result Check
3. Switch ON the generator and after initialization N/A
select the following parameters:
kV = 100, mA = 100, time = 50 ms.
4. Make an exposure and verify the following kV = 100 kV ± 3%.
results. mA = 100 mA ± 5%.
Time = 50 ms ± 2 ms.
5. Repeat step 4 but set the values to kV = 65 kV ± 3%.
kV = 65, mA = 200. mA = 200 mA ± 5%.
Time = 50 ms ± 2 ms.
6. Repeat step 4 but set the values to kV = 125 kV ± 3%.
kV = 125, mA = 200. mA = 200 mA ± 4%).
Time = 50 ms ± 2 ms.
7. Select 75 kV, 200 mA.
Select the exposure times shown below (3
point operation).

Measure time and mA on the ‘scope and


check that their product is as per the RESULT
column.

Measure time at 75% of the peak kV


waveform.

A: 10 ms (2 mAs) A: 2 mAs ± 5%.


B: 20 ms (4 mAs) B: 4 mAs ± 5%.
C: 63 ms (12 mAs) C: 12 mAs ± 5%.
D: 100 ms (20 mAs) D: 20 mAs ± 5%.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-05 Rev. B Page 4-5
4 Acceptance Testing CPI Canada Inc.

4.4.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (kV, TIME, mA AND mAs) Cont

Step Action Result Check


8. Select 75 kV. Use the time displayed in the
Select the mAs shown below (2 point LCD window as the reference for
operation). the measurements below.

Measure time at 75% of the peak kV


waveform.

A: 2 mAs (time per LCD display) ms per LCD disp ± (2% + 1ms).
B: 8 mAs (time per LCD display) ms per LCD disp ± (2% + 1ms).
C: 25 mAs (time per LCD display) ms per LCD disp ± (2% + 1ms).
D: 63 mAs (time per LCD display) ms per LCD disp ± (2% + 1ms).
9. Select 200 mA, 50 ms (3 point operation).

Select the kV values shown below.

Verify the actual kV per the RESULT column.

A: 50 kV A: 50 kV ± (3% + 1 kV).
B: 60 kV B: 60 kV ± (3% + 1 kV).
C: 80 kV C: 80 kV ± (3% + 1 kV).
D: 100 kV D: 100 kV ± (3% + 1 kV).
E: 125 kV E: 125 kV ± (3% + 1 kV).
10. Select 75 kV, 50 ms (3 point operation).

Select the mA values shown below.

Measure mA at 75% of the peak kV waveform.

Verify the actual mA per the RESULT column.

A: 50 mA A: 50 mA ± (5% + 1 mA).
B: 100 mA B: 100 mA ± (5% + 1 mA).
C: 200 mA C: 200 mA ± (5% + 1 mA).
D: 400 mA D: 400 mA ± (5% + 1 mA).

4.5.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (AEC)

This section applies only to generators with AEC.


• Review Section 3D: AEC Calibration.
• Recheck the mAs, dose, and O.D. as recorded during initial installation. Follow the appropriate steps
in section 3D to verify the AEC calibration.

4.6.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (HVL, LINEARITY AND REPRODUCIBILITY)

The procedure for performing reproducibility, linearity and HVL testing is contained in a separate
document, part number 740917 that immediately follows this page.

Page 4-6 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-05 Rev. B
CPI Canada Inc Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing

SUPPLEMENT

REPRODUCIBILTY, LINEARITY,
& HVL TESTING
CONTENTS:

1.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................. 2
2.0 EQUIPMENT SETUP ...................................................................................................................................... 3
3.0 REPRODUCIBILITY........................................................................................................................................ 3
4.0 LINEARITY...................................................................................................................................................... 7
5.0 H.V.L. EVALUATION....................................................................................................................................... 9

X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement 740917-00 Rev. B Page 1


Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing CPI Canada Inc

1.0 INTRODUCTION

This supplement describes reproducibility, linearity, and half - value layer (HVL) tests which may be used
to verify performance of medical X-ray generators.

NOTE: THIS SUPPLEMENT DETAILS TYPICAL REPRODUCIBILITY, LINEARITY, AND HVL TESTS.
LOCAL REGULATIONS SHOULD ALWAYS BE CONSULTED PRIOR TO PERFORMING
THESE TESTS, AS DETAILS MAY VARY IN SOME JURISDICTIONS, OR ADDITIONAL
TESTS MAY NEED TO BE PERFORMED.

WARNING: SOME EXPOSURES IN THIS SECTION MUST BE TAKEN AT THE MAXIMUM


GENERATOR KVP. THE X-RAY TUBE MUST BE KNOWN TO BE CAPABLE OF
OPERATION AT THAT KVP VALUE, AND THE TUBE SHOULD FIRST BE SEASONED
TO ENSURE THAT OPERATION AT HIGH KVP VALUES WILL NOT BE PROBLEMATIC.

Page 2 Rev. B X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement 740917-00


CPI Canada Inc Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing

2.0 EQUIPMENT SETUP

1. Place the radiation probe above the table approximately 25 cm (10”). Select an SID of
approximately 100 cm (40”).

2. Place a lead diaphragm over the detector and adjust its height so that the X-ray beam covers the
detector but does not over radiate the sides of the probe. Refer to figure 1.

X-RAY
TUBE

100 CM (40")
LEAD DIAPHRAGM

RADIATION PROBE
25 CM (10")

Figure 1: Dose measurement setup

3.0 REPRODUCIBILITY

Calculate reproducibility as follows:

1. Using kV and mA/ms or mAs values per tables 1 to 4, make a series of 5 exposures.

2. Record each of the measured dose values, in mGy, in the appropriate table. Refer to step 3
before starting step 2.
To convert mR to mGy, divide the value in mR by 114.5. This will give the value in mGy.
(for example 114.5 mR = 1 mGy).

3. Record the preselected mAs for each series of exposures in the header of each table. For 3 point
generators, this is the calculated mAs value where mAs = mA X time in seconds (example for
160 mA and 125 ms, mAs = 160 X 0.125 = 20 mAs).

X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement 740917-00 Rev. B Page 3


Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing CPI Canada Inc

3.0 REPRODUCIBILITY (Cont)

4. Calculate and record the average dose K (kerma) in mGy.

5. Calculate the difference, K – K, for each exposure.

6. Square each difference from the previous step.

7. Calculate the sum of the differences squared.

8. Calculate the standard deviation (S) by using the formula.

9. Calculate reproducibility by dividing S by K.

10. Table 5 shows example reproducibility calculations.

11. If linearity is to be measured, it is suggested that dose measurements be taken at this time for
entry into tables 6 and 7. Refer to 4.0 LINEARITY for details.

IN TABLES 1 TO 4, 3 POINT MEANS THAT FOR GENERATORS WHERE KV, MA, AND TIME
SELECTION IS AVAILABLE, THE KV, MA AND MS VALUES SHOWN SHOULD BE USED. FOR
GENERATORS WHERE 2 POINT OPERATION ONLY IS AVAILABLE, THE KV AND MAS VALUES
SHOWN SHOULD BE USED.

3 point = Minimum kV, maximum mA, 100 ms.


2 point = Minimum kV, maximum mAs. mAs = __________

EXP No. DOSE (K) DIFFERENCE DIFFERENCE2


mGy
1
2
3
4
5
Calculate each of the differences Square each difference. Then
K= ie: DIFF1 = K1 - K. calculate the sum of the difference2.
________ Repeat for each remaining K Sum of difference2 = _________
value.
Calculate standard deviation (S) using formula at beginning of this section: S = __________

Calculate reproducibility = S = _________ (not to exceed 0.045)


K

Table 1: Reproducibility

Page 4 Rev. B X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement 740917-00


CPI Canada Inc Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing

3.0 REPRODUCIBILITY (Cont)

3 point = Maximum kV, minimum mA, 100 ms.


2 point = Maximum kV, minimum mAs. mAs = __________

EXP No. DOSE (K) DIFFERENCE DIFFERENCE2


mGy
1
2
3
4
5
Calculate each of the differences Square each difference. Then
K= ie: DIFF1 = K1 - K. calculate the sum of the difference2.
________ Repeat for each remaining K Sum of difference2 = _________
value.
Calculate standard deviation (S) using formula at beginning of this section: S = __________

Calculate reproducibility = S = _________ (not to exceed 0.045)


K

Table 2: Reproducibility

3 point = 50% of maximum kV, 250 ms, mA to give 100 - 500 mR (0.9 – 4.4 mGy) dose.
2 point = 50% of maximum kV, mAs to give 100 - 500 mR (0.9 – 4.4 mGy) dose. mAs = __________

EXP No. DOSE (K) DIFFERENCE DIFFERENCE2


mGy
1
2
3
4
5
Calculate each of the differences Square each difference. Then
K= ie: DIFF1 = K1 - K. calculate the sum of the difference2.
________ Repeat for each remaining K Sum of difference2 = _________
value.
Calculate standard deviation (S) using formula at beginning of this section: S = __________

Calculate reproducibility = S = _________ (not to exceed 0.045)


K

Table 3: Reproducibility

X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement 740917-00 Rev. B Page 5


Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing CPI Canada Inc

3.0 REPRODUCIBILITY (Cont)

3 point = 80% of maximum kV, 250 ms, mA to give 100 - 500 mR (0.9 – 4.4 mGy) dose.
2 point = 80% of maximum kV, mAs to give 100 - 500 mR (0.9 – 4.4 mGy) dose. mAs = __________
EXP No. DOSE (K) DIFFERENCE DIFFERENCE2
mGy
1
2
3
4
5
Calculate each of the differences Square each difference. Then
K= ie: DIFF1 = K1 - K. calculate the sum of the difference2.
________ Repeat for each remaining K Sum of difference2 = _________
value.
Calculate standard deviation (S) using formula at beginning of this section: S = __________

Calculate reproducibility = S = _________ (not to exceed 0.045)


K

Table 4: Reproducibility

EXAMPLE mAs = _20_


EXP No. DOSE (K) DIFFERENCE DIFFERENCE2
mGy
1 2.17 0.036 0.001296
2 2.14 0.006 0.000036
3 2.13 0.004 0.000016
4 2.11 0.024 0.000576
5 2.12 0.014 0.000196
Calculate each of the differences Square each difference. Then
K= ie: DIFF1 = K1 - K. calculate the sum of the difference2.
_2.134_ Repeat for each remaining K Sum of difference2 = _0.00212_
value.
Calculate standard deviation (s) using formula at beginning of this section: S = _0.0230_

Calculate reproducibility = S = _0.011_ (not to exceed 0.045)


K

Table 5: Reproducibility

Page 6 Rev. B X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement 740917-00


CPI Canada Inc Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing

4.0 LINEARITY

1. Record two additional series of dose measurements for entry into tables 6 and 7:
• For table 6, use settings per table 3 EXCEPT use an mA (or mAs) value adjacent to the mA
(or mAs) setting used in table 3.
• For table 7, use settings per table 4 EXCEPT use an mA (or mAs) value adjacent to the mA
(or mAs) setting used in table 4.
• Record the mAs in the header of tables 6 and 7 as per 3.0 step 3.

1. Calculate and record the average dose K (kerma) in mGy for tables 6 and 7.

2. Record the preselected mAs and the average dose values taken from tables 3 and 4, and from
tables 6 and 7, at the top of the next page.

3. Using the appropriate mAs and K values, calculate X3, X4, X6, and X7 in tables 8 and 9.

4. Calculate the coefficient of linearity, L, as per tables 8 and 9.

mAs = __________
EXP No. DOSE (mGy)
1
2
3
4
5

K = ________

Table 6: Linearity

mAs = __________
EXP No. DOSE (mGy)
1
2
3
4
5

K = ________

Table 7: Linearity

X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement 740917-00 Rev. B Page 7


Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing CPI Canada Inc

4.0 LINEARITY (Cont)

Record the mAs and K values taken from tables 3, 4, 6, and 7 below.

Table 3 mAs3 = _____ K3 = _____

Table 4 mAs4 = _____ K4 = _____

Table 6 mAs6 = _____ K6 = _____

Table 7 mAs7 = _____ K7 = _____

K3
X3 = = ________
mAs3

K6
X6 = = ________
mAs6

X3 - X6
L = = ________ (not to exceed 0.095)
X3 + X6
In the numerator of the above equation, use the absolute value of X3 - X6
(disregard the minus sign).

Table 8: Linearity

K4
X4 = = ________
mAs4

K7
X7 = = ________
mAs7

X4 - X7
L = = ________ (not to exceed 0.095)
X4 + X7
In the numerator of the above equation, use the absolute value of X4 - X7
(disregard the minus sign).

Table 9: Linearity

Page 8 Rev. B X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement 740917-00


CPI Canada Inc Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing

5.0 H.V.L. EVALUATION

1. Be sure the X-ray source assembly (X-ray tube and beam limiting device) is fully assembled and
functional.

2. Use the test setup as per figure 1.

3. Set the generator as follows: 3 point generators, 80 kV, 200 mA, 50 ms, large focus. For 2 point
generators use 80 kV, 200 mA if this can be set, and 10 mAs.

4. Take a series of three exposures and record the dose K (kerma) values in mGy in table 10.
Calculate and record the average of the three exposures.

5. Place 2 mm of Al on top of the lead diaphragm (total of 2 mm added), repeat the exposure and
record the K value in table 10.

6. Place an additional 1 mm of Al on top of the lead diaphragm (total of 3 mm added), repeat the
exposure; and record the K value in table 10.

7. Place an additional 3 mm of Al on top of the lead diaphragm (total of 6 mm added), repeat the
exposure; and record the K value in table 10.

8. The relative transmission for the average of the three K values where no Al was added is
assigned a value of 1.00. Using that base, assign relative transmission values to the remaining K
values. For example, if the average K value was 2.15 and has a relative transmission factor of
1.00, then 1.41 mGy will have a relative transmission of 1.41 / 2.15 = 0.66.

9. Plot the relative transmission values in figure 1. This should produce a straight line on the graph
since the X-axis is logarithmic.

10. Interpolate to determine the HVL. The Al thickness at a relative transmission of 0.5 will be the
required HVL value.

11. Repeat steps 4 to 10: 3 point generators, 100 kV, 200 mA, 50 ms, large focus. For 2 point
generators use 100 kV, 200 mA if this can be set, and 10 mAs. Use table 11 to record the values
and figure 2 to plot the results

12. Table 12 and figure 3 show example HVL determination.

X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement 740917-00 Rev. B Page 9


Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing CPI Canada Inc

5.0 H.V.L. EVALUATION (Cont)

ADDED ALUMINUM FILTER DOSE (mGy) RELATIVE TRANSMISSION


0
0
0
0 (Average of three readings) 1.00
2 (total 2 mm)
1 (total 3 mm)
3 (total 6 mm)

Table 10: HVL dose values 80 kVp

Figure 1: HVL plot 80 kVp

For 80 kVp, the HVL must be ≥ 2.9 mm Al.

Page 10 Rev. B X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement 740917-00


CPI Canada Inc Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing

5.0 H.V.L. EVALUATION (Cont)

ADDED ALUMINUM FILTER DOSE (mGy) RELATIVE TRANSMISSION


0
0
0
0 (Average of three readings) 1.00
2 (total 2 mm)
1 (total 3 mm)
3 (total 6 mm)

Table 11: HVL dose values 100 kVp

Figure 2: HVL plot 100 kVp

For 100 kVp, the HVL must be ≥ 3.6 mm Al.

X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement 740917-00 Rev. B Page 11


Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing CPI Canada Inc

5.0 H.V.L. EVALUATION (Cont)

ADDED ALUMINUM FILTER DOSE (mGy) RELATIVE TRANSMISSION


0 2.17
0 2.13
0 2.16
0 (Average of above three readings) 2.15 1.00
2 (total 2 mm) 1.41 .66
1 (total 3 mm) 1.14 .53
3 (total 6 mm) 0.61 .28

Table 12: HVL dose values (example)

Figure 3: HVL plot (example)

By interpolating the thickness of Al at a relative transmission value of 0.5, it can be seen that the HVL is
approximately 3.3.

Page 12 Rev. B X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement 740917-00


CPI Canada Inc. Troubleshooting 5

CHAPTER 5

TROUBLESHOOTING
CONTENTS:

SECTION TITLE
5.1.0 INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................................................................... 2
5.2.0 STATUS AND ERROR CODES .............................................................................................................................. 3
5.2.1 Operator Messages .............................................................................................................................................. 3
5.2.2 Limit Messages..................................................................................................................................................... 3
5.2.3 Error Messages .................................................................................................................................................... 5
5.3.0 MISCELLANEOUS FAULTS.................................................................................................................................. 14
5.3.1 Erratic Console Faults ........................................................................................................................................ 14

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-06 Rev. E Page 5-1
5 Troubleshooting CPI Canada Inc.

5.1.0 INTRODUCTION

The CMP 200 operator’s console will display status messages on the LCD display during normal and
abnormal operation of the generator. This chapter contains tables of those messages and suggests actions to
be taken by service personnel to correct any malfunctions that may occur.

Page 5-2 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-06 Rev. E
CPI Canada Inc. Troubleshooting 5
5.2.0 STATUS AND ERROR CODES

5.2.1 Operator Messages

These messages indicate the status of the generator.


MESSAGE MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
(membrane console) (touch screen console)
DAP NOT READY DAP not ready The optional DAP is in its “warm up” state, and not ready to make DAP
measurements.
INITIALIZATION Displayed during power up sequence.
SPINNING ROTOR Displayed when prep state is active.
X-RAY ON Displayed during an X-ray exposure.
X-RAY READY Generator Ready Indicates that the generator is ready to make an exposure.
Generator offline… Indicates that the console is unable to communicate with the generator.
Ensure that the generator is switched on, and that the console cable is properly
connected to the console.
Consult your service representative if this does not solve the problem.

5.2.2 Limit Messages

These messages indicate that an exposure has been requested that exceeds one or more limits.
MESSAGE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION
(membrane console) (touch screen console)
AEC DENSITY LIM. Generator AEC density Requested density not programmed. Select another density or
limit program requested density
step.
ANODE HEAT WARN. Anode warning level Anode has exceeded programmed warning Wait for anode to cool.
exceeded level.
CAL LIMIT Calibration limit: selected Requested parameter not calibrated. Recalibrate X-ray tube or
parameter not calibrated. select a calibrated parameter.
DAP ACCUM. WARN DAP accumulation The accumulated DAP value exceeds the Reset the DAP.
Warning. programmed DAP limit.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-06 Rev. E Page 5-3
CPI Canada Inc. Troubleshooting 5
5.2.2 Limit Messages (Cont)

MESSAGE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION


(membrane console) (touch screen console)
GEN DUTY WARNING Generator duty cycle The X-ray generator has reached its duty cycle Re-evaluate technique factors.
limit warning limit. Allow generator to cool if
possible. If exposures are
continued, serious generator
damage may result due to
overheating.
GEN. JOULE LIMIT Generator Joule Limit The requested exposure will exceed the Allow the generator to cool
generators kilo joule heat limit. sufficiently to allow the
requested exposure.
GEN. KV LIMIT Generator kV limit Requested kV not allowed as generator kV limit None.
has been reached.
GEN. KW LIMIT Generator kW limit Requested parameter not allowed as generator None.
kW limit has been reached.
GEN. MA LIMIT Generator mA limit Requested mA not allowed as generator mA None.
limit has been reached.
GEN. MAS LIMIT Generator mAs limit Requested mAs not allowed as generator mAs None.
limit has been reached.
GEN. MS LIMIT Generator ms limit Requested ms not allowed as generator ms limit None.
has been reached.
INVALID PARAM. Invalid communication Generator detected invalid parameter within Select valid parameter.
parameter. received message, message ignored.
TUBE KV LIMIT Tube kV limit Requested kV not allowed as tube kV limit has None.
been reached.
TUBE KW LIMIT Tube kW limit Requested parameter not allowed as tube kW None.
limit has been reached.
TUBE MA LIMIT Tube mA limit Requested mA not allowed as tube mA limit has None.
been reached.
TUBE MAS LIMIT Tube mAs limit Requested mAs not allowed as tube mAs limit None.
has been reached.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-06 Rev. E Page 5-4
CPI Canada Inc. Troubleshooting 5
5.2.3 Error Messages

These messages indicate that an error has occurred. The errors are logged in the error log; previous errors should be reviewed by service
personnel before taking further action.
ERROR MESSAGE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION
CODE (membrane console) (touch screen console)
APR MEMORY APR data has been corrupted. See note 1 near end of this
ERROR section.
E001 GEN EPROM ERR. Generator CPU EPROM Generator CPU EPROM has been Call product support for new
checksum error corrupted. generator CPU EPROM.
E003 GEN NVRAM ERR. Generator CPU NVRAM Generator CPU NVRAM data has Re-initialize generator CPU
error been corrupted. NVRAM using generator
factory defaults.
E004 GEN RTC ERROR Generator CPU Real Generator CPU real time clock is not Reset time and date.
Time Clock error functioning.
E005 PS CONTACT ERR. Main Contactor Error Main contactor in generator did not Call product support.
energize.
E006 ROTOR FAULT Rotor Fault 1. Rotor starter may have detected Power unit off and retry rotor
a current fault in the stator. start.
2. Generator was not ready to start
rotor.
E007 FILAMENT FAULT Filament Fault Generator has detected filament 1. Check for open filament in
current <2 amps. X-ray tube.
2. Check for poor connections
in the cathode cable.
3. Check fuses on filament
board(s).
E008 KV/MA FAULT kV / mA Fault The generator has detected a fault in 1. If arcing of the X-ray tube is
the kV or mA output during an suspected, check condition
exposure and immediately of tube. The X-ray tube
terminated the exposure. This may may be damaged or simply
be caused by arcing in the X-ray require “seasoning”. Refer
tube, arcing of the HV cables, or HT to chapter 6 for tube
tank. seasoning procedure.
2. If failure of HT tank is
suspected, contact product
support.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-06 Rev. E Page 5-5
CPI Canada Inc. Troubleshooting 5
5.2.3 Error Messages (Cont)

ERROR MESSAGE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION


CODE (membrane console) (touch screen console)
E009 PS NOT READY Power Supply Not Ready The generator is not ready to make Retry exposure.
an exposure.
E011 HIGH MA FAULT mA During Exposure Generator CPU detected mA greater Recalibrate X-ray tube. *
Too High than allowed tolerance.
E012 LOW MA FAULT mA During Exposure Generator CPU detected mA less Recalibrate X-ray tube. *
Too Low than allowed tolerance.
E013 MANUAL TERMIN. Manually Terminated Operator released exposure switch 1. Re-take exposure if
Exposure during exposure. necessary.
2. Check for faulty switch
contacts or wiring.
E014 AEC BUT ERROR AEC Back-up Timer - AEC exposure exceeded allowed 1. Check exposure technique
Exposure Terminated back up time. settings.
2. Check that correct AEC
chamber is energized.
E015 AEC BU MAS ERR. AEC mAs Exceeded - AEC exposure exceeded allowed 1. Check exposure technique
Exposure Terminated back up mAs. settings.
2. Check that correct AEC
chamber is energized.
E016 TOMO BUT ERROR Tomo Back-up Timer – Tomo exposure exceeded backup 1. Check exposure technique
Exposure Terminated time. settings.
2. Increase tomo backup time,
if necessary.
E017 NOT CALIBRATED Uncalibrated Exposure Selected mA not calibrated for Recalibrate X-ray tube.
Parameter selected kV.
E018 PREP TIMEOUT Preparation Timeout Generator has been in prep state too Reduce length of time in prep
long. state.
E019 ANODE HEAT LIMIT Anode Heat Limit Selected parameters will cause X- Reduce parameters or wait for
ray tube to exceed its programmed tube to cool.
anode heat limit.
E020 THERMAL INT #1 Thermal Switch Interlock X-ray tube # 1 too hot and its thermal Wait for X-ray tube # 1 to cool.
#1 Error switch has opened.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-06 Rev. E Page 5-6
CPI Canada Inc. Troubleshooting 5
5.2.3 Error Messages (Cont)

ERROR MESSAGE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION


CODE (membrane console) (touch screen console)
E022 DOOR INTERLOCK Door Interlock Error Door is open. Close door.
E028 PREP SW CLOSED Prep Input Active During Prep input active during power on Check prep switch and input
Initialization Phase initialization phase. for short circuit.
E029 X-RAY SW CLOSED X-ray Input Active During X-ray input active during power on Check X-ray switch and input
Initialization Phase initialization phase. for short circuit.
E032 CONSOLE COMM Console Communication Generator has detected error in 1. Check console cable for
ERR Error communication to console. damage and proper
connection.
2. Turn power off and then on
to reset generator.
E033 GEN BATTERY LOW Warning Lithium Battery Generator detects lithium battery Replace lithium battery.
Voltage Low voltage is low.
E034 +12VDC ERROR +12 V DC Error +12VDC rail is out of tolerance. Check +12VDC rail.
E035 -12VDC ERROR -12 V DC Error -12VDC rail is out of tolerance. Check -12VDC rail.
E038 CAL DATA ERROR Calibration Data Corrupt Generator detects corrupt calibration Re-calibrate X-ray tube(s).
Error data.
E039 AEC DATA ERROR AEC data corrupt Generator detects corrupt AEC data. Reprogram AEC data or set
factory defaults.
E041 REC DATA ERROR Receptor data corrupt Generator detects corrupt receptor Reprogram receptor data or
data. set factory defaults.
E042 TUBE DATA ERR. Tube data corrupt Generator detects corrupt tube data. Reprogram tube data or set
factory defaults.
E043 KV ERROR High voltage error - kV kV detected in non X-ray state. Switch OFF generator.
detected in non X-ray Prevent further use of
state generator. Call product
support.
E044 COMM ERROR Invalid communication Received communication message Reset error.
message not valid and ignored.
E045 NOT SUPPORTED Communication Received message is valid, but not Reset error.
message not supported supported by this system.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-06 Rev. E Page 5-7
CPI Canada Inc. Troubleshooting 5
5.2.3 Error Messages (Cont)

ERROR MESSAGE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION


CODE (membrane console) (touch screen console)
E046 MODE INHIBITED Mode Inhibited Received message is valid, but not Reset error.
allowed during present state.
E049 NOT ENABLED Not enabled Requested function not programmed Reprogram to enable function.
to be enabled.
E050 GEN DATA ERROR Generator limit data Generator detects corrupt generator Reprogram generator limit
corrupt limit data. data or set factory defaults.
E051 AEC DEVICE ERR AEC feedback error (no Generator has detected no, or 1. Check that X-ray tube is
feedback signal insufficient, feedback signal from the pointing at correct AEC
detected) AEC device. device.
2. Check AEC cable for
damage and proper
connection.
E052 HIGH SF CURRENT High small focus filament Generator detects small focus Check small focus filament
current error in standby filament current greater than limits in board (units with 2 filament
standby mode. boards), or check filament
board (units with single
filament board).
E053 HIGH LF CURRENT High large focus filament Generator detects large focus Check large focus filament
current error in standby filament current greater than limits in board (units with 2 filament
standby mode. boards), or check filament
board (units with single
filament board).
E054 AEC OUT OF RANGE AEC reference out of AEC reference has reached a Re-adjust AEC calibration
range maximum or minimum limit. including density to operate
within AEC range (O to 1O
VDC).
E055 NO FIELDS ACTIVE No fields selected in AEC enabled but no fields are Select AEC field(s).
AEC mode selected.
E056 NO TUBE SELECTED Receptor Disabled All Receptors have no X-ray tube Program receptor(s) with tube
programmed. number.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-06 Rev. E Page 5-8
CPI Canada Inc. Troubleshooting 5

5.2.3 Error Messages (Cont)

ERROR MESSAGE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION


CODE (membrane console) (touch screen console)
E057 AEC STOP ERROR AEC stop signal In AEC stop signal (P.T. stop signal) is 1. Check that the P.T. ramp
wrong state active low indicating exposure is does not exceed the P.T.
finished during prep state. reference during prep state.
2. Check AEC device for
proper operation.
E058 CONSOLE BUT ERR. Console back-up timer Console has detected exposure Call product support.
exceeded backup time and
terminated exposure.
E060 EXP. KV HIGH High kV error kV exceeds high kV tolerance level. 1. Check the output of the kV
reference DAC on the
generator CPU board.
2. Measure the output of the
generator with a dynalyzer
or a non-invasive kVp
meter.
E061 EXP. KV LOW Low kV error kV exceeds low kV tolerance level. 1. Check the output of the kV
reference DAC on the
generator CPU board.
2. Measure the output of the
generator with a dynalyzer
or a non-invasive kVp
meter.
E063 FACTORY DEFAULTS Factory defaults set JW2 on the generator control board Set JW2 to the NORMAL
is set to the LOAD DEFAULTS position. The generator will not
position. exit the initialization phase
until this is done.
E065 TOMO DEVICE ERR. Tomo device error. The tomo start signal was not 1. Check the tomo
received within 30 seconds of connections to the
pressing the X-ray switch on the generator.
generator. 2. Check the tomo system.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-06 Rev. E Page 5-9
CPI Canada Inc. Troubleshooting 5
5.2.3 Error Messages (Cont)

ERROR MESSAGE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION


CODE (membrane console) (touch screen console)
E067 PS DUTY LIMIT Power supply duty cycle Power supply duty cycle limit Re-evaluate technique factors.
limit exceeded exceeded. Allow generator to cool if
possible. If exposures are
continued, serious generator
damage may result due to
overheating.
E071 DAP DOSE OVERFLW DAP overflow error The accumulated DAP value Reset the DAP.
exceeds the display limit.
E072 DAP DEVICE ERR. DAP device error The DAP device is not functional. 1. Check the DAP wiring.
2. Check the DAP interface
board.
E073 DAP DATA ERROR DAP data error The DAP configuration data is Reset factory defaults.
corrupted.
E074 INVERTER 1 ERROR Inverter 1 Error Power circuit failure. Contact product support.
E075 INVERTER 2 ERROR Inverter 2 Error Power circuit failure. Contact product support.
E077 RES. CIRCUIT ERR Resonant Circuit Error HT primary overcurrent detected. 1. Check for arcing of the X-
ray tube.
2. Check for arcing in the HT
tank; if failure of HT tank is
suspected, contact product
support.
E078 BUCKY1 INTERLOCK Bucky 1 Interlock error Indicates that Bucky 1 is not ready. Check Bucky 1.
E079 BUCKY2 INTERLOCK Bucky 2 Interlock error Indicates that Bucky 2 is not ready. Check Bucky 2.
E080 INTERLOCK 1 OPEN Interlock 1 Open Indicates that the interlock 1 is open. Check the circuits connected
to interlock 1. Refer to INPUTS
in chapter 3C.
E081 INTERLOCK 2 OPEN Interlock 2 Open Indicates that the interlock 2 is open. Check the circuits connected
to interlock 2. Refer to INPUTS
in chapter 3C.
E082 KV OVER VOLTAGE kV Over Voltage The output kV exceeded the 1. Auto calibrate tube (per
maximum allowed kV limit. TUBE CALIBRATION in
chapter 3C) *.
2. Consult product support.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-06 Rev. E Page 5-10
CPI Canada Inc. Troubleshooting 5
5.2.3 Error Messages (Cont)

ERROR MESSAGE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION


CODE (membrane console) (touch screen console)
E083 ANODE MA FAULT Anode mA Fault The anode current exceeded the 1. Check for arcing of the X-
maximum allowed limit. ray tube.
2. Check for arcing in the HT
tank; if failure of HT tank is
suspected, contact product
support.
E084 CATHODE MA FAULT Cathode mA Fault The cathode current exceeded the 1. Check for arcing of the X-
maximum allowed limit. ray tube.
2. Check for arcing in the HT
tank; if failure of HT tank is
suspected, contact product
support.
E085 ROTOR MAIN FAULT Rotor Main Fault Indicates that insufficient current was 1. Check the X-ray tube stator
sensed in the stator main winding. wiring.
2. Check the rotor board.
E086 ROTOR SHFT FAULT Rotor Shift Fault Indicates that insufficient current was 1. Check the X-ray tube stator
sensed in the stator shift winding. wiring.
2. Check the rotor board.
E100 CAL-MAX MA ERR. Calibration error – Maximum mA has been exceeded Repeat auto calibration and/or
maximum mA exceeded during auto calibration. decrease standby current.
E101 CAL-DATA LIMIT Calibration error – Auto calibration has exceeded data 1. Check to see if the filament
calibration data table table length due to an excessive standby current is too low.
exceeded number of exposures. 2. Retry auto calibration.
E102 CAL-MAX FIL ERR Calibration error – Maximum filament current for the 1. Check to see if the
maximum filament selected focus has been reached. maximum filament current
current exceeded limit can be increased.
2. Retry auto calibration.
E103 CAL-MAN. TERM. Calibration error – Operator released exposure button Retry auto Calibration.
manually terminated during auto calibration.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-06 Rev. E Page 5-11
CPI Canada Inc. Troubleshooting 5
5.2.3 Error Messages (Cont)

ERROR MESSAGE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION


CODE (membrane console) (touch screen console)
E104 CAL-NO MA Calibration error – no mA No mA feedback detected during Call product support.
auto calibration.
E105 CAL-MIN MA ERR. Calibration error – Minimum generator mA was Reduce filament standby
minimum mA not exceeded at start of calibration. current on primary and/or
calibrated secondary filament.
E240 OUT OF LABELS The printer is out of labels. Load more labels.
E241 LABEL JAMMED The labels are jammed. Clear the paper jam.
E242 PRINTER ERROR The printer self-diagnostics have Refer to the printer manual.
reported a printer problem.
E243 PRINTER COMM ERR The printer has reported a Try printing again.
communication error.
E244 PLATEN OPEN The paper platen is not positioned Check the platen position.
properly.
E245 PRINTER OFF-LINE The printer is off-line. Put the printer on-line.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-06 Rev. E Page 5-12
CPI Canada Inc. Troubleshooting 5

* The generator purges the existing X-ray tube auto calibration data before starting the auto calibration
routine and saving new calibration data. Therefore, auto calibration should be a last resort during
general troubleshooting, and should only be done to recalibrate the tube. For example, if a low mA
fault is presented, you should ensure that the generator is fully functional, and actually needs
recalibration. If calibration is attempted on a partially functional generator, the auto calibration routine
may be aborted before any calibration is done, and the generator will inhibit further exposures until the
selected mA is calibrated for the selected kV.

1. For an APR MEMORY ERROR fault, the console factory defaults must be restored or the APR must
be restored via GenWare®. The procedure for resetting console factory defaults is described in
chapter 6.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-06 Rev. E Page 5-13
5 Troubleshooting CPI Canada Inc.

5.3.0 MISCELLANEOUS FAULTS

5.3.1 Erratic Console Faults

SYMPTOM: In some environments that are “electrically noisy”, the console may exhibit erratic faults i.e. RAM
data error, intermittent loss of communication, or random fault messages may be displayed.

SOLUTION: Connect a separate ground wire, #14 AWG (2.3 mm2) or larger from the ground stud on the rear
of the console (marked CONSOLE GROUND in the figure “Rear of control console” in chapter 2)
to the ground stud located beside the main input fuse block. This is marked GROUND
CONNECTION in the figure “Generator mains connection” in chapter 2.

Page 5-14 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-06 Rev. E
CPI Canada Inc. Regular Maintenance 6

CHAPTER 6

REGULAR MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS:

SectionTitle
6.1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.0 SERVICE RECORD............................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ................................................................................................................................ 6-5
6.4.0 OIL FILL / LEVEL CHECK...................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.5.0 CLEANING ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.6.0 EPROM REPLACEMENT ...................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.6.1 Console EPROM ................................................................................................................................................ 6-8
6.6.2 Generator EPROM ............................................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.6.3 Setting Factory Defaults ..................................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.7.0 BATTERY REPLACEMENT................................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.8.0 AEC BOARD REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .................................................................................................. 6-10
6.9.0 TUBE CONDITIONING / SEASONING ............................................................................................................... 6-11
6.9.1 Tube Conditioning ............................................................................................................................................ 6-11
6.10.0 END OF PRODUCT LIFE .................................................................................................................................. 6-12

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-07 Rev. F Page 6-1
6 Regular Maintenance CPI Canada Inc.

6.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides a recommended schedule for periodic maintenance of the CMP 200 X-ray generator.
The initial installation date and location, and all service performed on the generator, should be
recorded in table 6-1. The record should be as thorough as possible, detailing the scope and type of work that
was performed (all service and a record of all replacement parts that were installed). Additionally, the person
performing the work should date and sign the record.
This information will be invaluable in the future for traceability and to ensure continued compatibility of
the generator.

If a major component (such as the HT oil tank or a major circuit board) is replaced, recalibration will be
needed. A separate procedure will be included with the spare in those cases, detailing the required
calibration procedure. The acceptance test procedure per Chapter 4 should then be performed prior to
placing the generator back into service.

WARNING: MAINTENANCE IS TO BE PERFORMED ONLY BY COMPETENT, TRAINED PERSONNEL


WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH THE POTENTIAL HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH THIS
EQUIPMENT.

NOTE: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE FREQUENCY MAY BE DICTATED BY CERTAIN


REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS OF THE COUNTRY OR STATE IN WHICH THE
INSTALLATION IS LOCATED. ALWAYS CHECK THE LOCAL CODES AND
REGULATIONS WHEN SETTING THE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.

WARNING: ALWAYS SWITCH OFF MAINS POWER TO THE GENERATOR AND WAIT A MINIMUM OF
5 MINUTES FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE BEGINNING ANY
PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE, INCLUDING CLEANING.

Page 6-2 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-07 Rev. F
CPI Canada Inc. Regular Maintenance 6
6.2.0 SERVICE RECORD

INSTALLED BY: __________________ DATE: ______________ LOCATION: _________________________


Service Date Description of Service Performed By

Table 6-1: Installation and service record

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-07 Rev. F Page 6-3
6 Regular Maintenance CPI Canada Inc.

(This page intentionally left blank)

Page 6-4 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-07 Rev. F
CPI Canada Inc. Regular Maintenance 6
6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Maintenance Description of Preventative Maintenance


Frequency
Every 6 Months AND 1. Clean and re-grease all HV connections using vapor proof compound.
whenever a related 2. Check that all HV connections are tight.
certifiable X-ray
component is replaced: 3. Clean the control console, and main cabinet as needed. REFER TO
6.5.0 CLEANING BEFORE PROCEEDING.
4. Perform the X-ray tube auto calibration routine; refer to Chapter 3C.
5. Verify the calibration of the generator; refer to Chapter 4.
6. Test the X-ray tube thermal switch circuits in the generator.
Disconnect the tube thermal switch and verify the correct error
message, and that X-ray exposures are inhibited.
7. Perform any additional tests required by laws governing this
installation.
Every 12 months: 1. Examine the following for any visible damage and replace any
damaged components:
• The exterior of the control console, including the membrane
switch assembly.
• The cable between the control console and the generator main
cabinet.
• The hand switch (if used) and the cables connecting this to the
console.
• The HT cables.
2. Open the generator main cabinet and examine the unit for any visible
damage: missing or loose ground connections, oil leaks, damaged
cables etc.
Every 3 years: Replace the cooling fan in the generator main cabinet.
Every 5 years: Replace the lithium battery on the CPU board in the control console and in
the generator. Refer to the spares list in chapter 8 for the required part
number. Refer to 6.7.0 for the battery replacement procedure.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-07 Rev. F Page 6-5
6 Regular Maintenance CPI Canada Inc.

6.4.0 OIL FILL / LEVEL CHECK

The insulating oil level in the HT tank does NOT require periodic checking under normal conditions. However,
if there is evidence of possible oil loss, the procedure for checking the correct oil level follows.

1. Loosen the oil fill plug screw on the tank lid.

2. With the screw sufficiently loosened, remove the rubber (neoprene) plug.

3. Use a clean ruler, strip of cardboard, or other equivalent material to determine the oil level, measured
always from the TOP surface of the lid of the HT tank.
• Normally the oil level should be between 0.88 - 1.25 inches (22 - 32 mm) from the top of the tank
lid.
• If the oil level is between 1.25 - 1.6 inches (32 - 41 mm) from the top of the tank lid, then clean oil
should be added as needed.
• If the oil level is greater than 1.6 inches (41 mm) below the top of the tank lid, please consult the
factory.

4. Use only fresh oil, type Shell DIALA AX or equivalent. It is critical that air is not added when topping up
the oil. The following procedure is strongly recommended when adding oil.
• Use a new clean syringe to remove oil from the container. A 60 cc catheter tip syringe is
recommended. Approximately 60 cc of oil is required to raise the oil level by one millimeter.
• Turn the syringe upright and expel any trapped air.
• Place the tip of the syringe through the oil-fill plug and into the oil, ensuring that it is below the
surface of the oil.
• Gently eject the oil from the syringe into the HT tank, while making sure that the tip of the syringe
remains below the surface of the oil until all of the oil is emptied from the syringe.
• Repeat the previous steps until the required amount of oil has been added.

5. Replace the oil fill plug. Once the plug is installed and the screw is properly seated, tighten the screw
4 turns. This will secure the oil fill plug. Wipe up any spills. Dispose of soiled absorber in compliance
with government requirements, and ensure conformity to local disposal regulations. THE OIL DOES
NOT CONTAIN PCBs.

Page 6-6 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-07 Rev. F
CPI Canada Inc. Regular Maintenance 6
6.4.0 OIL FILL / LEVEL CHECK (Cont)

Figure 6-1: HT tank oil fill

6.5.0 CLEANING

• Never use anything other than mild soap and water to clean plastic surfaces. Other cleaners may damage
the plastic.
• Never use any corrosive, solvent or abrasive detergents or polishes.
• Ensure that no water or other liquid can enter any equipment. This precaution prevents short circuits and
corrosion forming on components.
• Methods of disinfection used must conform to legal regulations and guidelines regarding disinfection and
explosion protection.
• If disinfectants are used which form explosive mixtures of gases, these gases must have dissipated before
switching on the equipment again.
• Disinfection by spraying is not recommended because the disinfectant may enter the X-ray equipment.
• If room disinfection is done with an atomizer, it is recommended that the equipment be switched OFF,
allowed to cool down and covered with a plastic sheet. When the disinfectant mist has subsided, the
plastic sheet may be removed and the equipment be disinfected by wiping.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-07 Rev. F Page 6-7
6 Regular Maintenance CPI Canada Inc.

6.6.0 EPROM REPLACEMENT

WARNING: PLEASE TAKE APPROPRIATE ELECTROSTATIC PRECAUTIONS AT ALL TIMES WHEN


HANDLING THE EPROM(S).
REFER TO 6.6.3, SETTING FACTORY DEFAULTS, AFTER REPLACING THE EPROM(S).

THE FOLLOWING SOFTWARE SETS MUST ONLY BE USED ON GENERATORS WITH


COOLING FANS. USE OF THIS FIRMWARE IN UNITS WITHOUT COOLING FANS MAY
CAUSE SEVERE GENERATOR DAMAGE.
SOFTWARE SET APPLICATION
73940300 30 kW medical
73940600 32 kW medical
73940900 40 kW medical
73941200 50 kW medical
73941500 30 kW chiropractic
73941600 32 kW chiropractic
73941700 40 kW chiropractic
739418 50 kW chiropractic

6.6.1 Console EPROM

1. Switch the generator OFF at the console, and disconnect the mains voltage.

2. Turn the console on its face. A soft, clean cloth should be placed on the work surface to protect the
console from damage while it is face down.

3. Disconnect all connections, including the console ground connection, from the rear of the console.

4. Remove and temporarily set aside the jackscrews from the ‘D’ connectors on the rear of the console.
Remove and temporarily set aside the hardware from the console ground stud.

5. Remove the 6 screws securing the base to the molded case.

6. Gently remove the console bottom (the metal bottom panel with the feet attached).

7. Locate and carefully remove the existing EPROM U6 on the console board. Refer to the appropriate
figure in chapter 1, in the section GENERATOR LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS.

8. Carefully insert the replacement EPROM into the socket observing the orientation per the figure
identified in the previous step.

9. Re-assemble the console in the reverse order of the above. Use of a removable thread locker (loctite
or equivalent) is recommended when reinstalling the jackscrews to prevent them from loosening if the
mating connectors are removed.

10. Reconnect the console ground and all cables removed in step 3.

Page 6-8 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-07 Rev. F
CPI Canada Inc. Regular Maintenance 6
6.6.2 Generator EPROM

The AEC board will need to be temporarily removed to replace the generator EPROM, if the AEC option is
fitted. Refer to 6.8.0 for the procedure to remove and replace the AEC board.

1. Switch the generator OFF at the console, and disconnect the mains voltage.

2. Remove the generator cover as described in chapter 2.

3. Locate and carefully remove the existing EPROM U6 on the generator control board. Refer to the
appropriate figure in chapter 1, in the section GENERATOR LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS.

4. Carefully insert the replacement EPROM into the socket observing the orientation per the figure
identified in the previous step.

6.6.3 Setting Factory Defaults

Should the part number (not revision) of the replacement EPROM be different from the EPROM being
replaced, then the factory default procedure(s) must be performed as detailed below. This will initialize the
CPU’s NVRAM as required by the new software and sets the data to its factory-configured state. Note that
there are separate procedures for the console CPU and for the generator CPU.

CONSOLE CPU FACTORY DEFAULTS:

The procedure for loading console defaults is described in chapter 3C. Refer to LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS.
This is described in the section UTILITY MENU, under CONSOLE.

GENERATOR CPU FACTORY DEFAULTS:

1. Switch the generator OFF at the console, and disconnect the mains voltage.

2. Remove the generator cover as described in chapter 2.

3. Locate JW2 on the generator control board. Refer to the appropriate figure in chapter 1, in the section
GENERATOR LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS.

4. Set JW2 to the LOAD DEFAULTS position.

5. Switch ON the generator. After a brief period, the console will pause at the message FACTORY
DEFAULTS.

6. Switch OFF the generator. Set JW2 back to the NORMAL position.

This will initialize all generator data to the factory defaults [tube selection, generator limits (including anode
boost time), receptor setup, I/O configuration, AEC setup, AEC calibration, tube calibration, time & date, error
log and statistics].

NOTE: IF THE FACTORY DEFAULTS HAVE BEEN SET, CRITICAL PARAMETERS (I.E ANODE BOOST
TIME, ETC) MUST BE MANUALLY REPROGRAMMED BEFORE OPERATING THE GENERATOR.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-07 Rev. F Page 6-9
6 Regular Maintenance CPI Canada Inc.

6.7.0 BATTERY REPLACEMENT

The AEC board will need to be temporarily removed to replace the battery, if the AEC option is fitted. Refer to
6.8.0 for the procedure to remove and replace the AEC board.

1. Switch the generator OFF at the console, and disconnect the mains voltage.

2. Refer to 6.6.0 (EPROM replacement) for the procedure to access the console board or the generator
control board as required to change the batteries. The figures described in 6.6.0 that show the
EPROMs also show the battery locations.

3. Remove the battery from the holder by gently prying under the battery at the access slot in the battery
holder using a small screwdriver. Slide the battery over the edge of the holder and remove it when it is
free.

4. Check the voltage of the new battery prior to inserting it. This should be nominally 3.2V, do not use if it
is under 2.90 V.

5. Wipe the replacement battery with a clean cloth, and ensure that the holder is clean before inserting
the new battery.

6. Gently lift the spring contact on the holder and insert the replacement battery, positive (+) side up.

7. A stamp error message may be observed at initial turn-on after replacing the battery. This is normal at
this point and will be cleared by setting the date and time in the next step.

8. Reset the date and time, if required. Refer to chapter 3C for the procedure to do this.

6.8.0 AEC BOARD REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

1. Switch the generator OFF at the console, and disconnect the mains voltage.

2. Disconnect the AEC chamber connections at the AEC board.

3. Disconnect the AEC control cable at J7 of the generator control board.

4. Locate the four nylon standoffs that secure the AEC board to the control board.

5. Turn the head of each plunger on the nylon standoffs approximately 90° counterclockwise.

6. Gently lift the AEC board off the nylon standoffs. Set the AEC board aside until the required
components underneath are replaced. The AEC board should only be placed on a static-safe surface.

7. Reverse the above steps to replace the AEC board.

Page 6-10 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-07 Rev. F
CPI Canada Inc. Regular Maintenance 6
6.9.0 TUBE CONDITIONING / SEASONING

Tube conditioning or “seasoning” is particularly important for new tubes or tubes that have not been used for
several days. This should be performed on each X-ray tube before attempting auto calibration, as an
unseasoned tube may not operate properly at higher kV values without arcing. Refer to the X-ray tube
manufacturer’s instructions, if available, for the tube conditioning or “seasoning” procedure. If the X-ray tube
manufacturers instructions are not available, the following procedure may be used:

6.9.1 Tube Conditioning

The generator does X-ray tube auto calibration at 50 kV, 60 kV, 70 kV, 80 kV, 100 kV and 120 kV. The tube
normally needs to be seasoned before it can be operated at the higher voltages encountered during auto
calibration.
Tube seasoning is started by auto calibrating the kV stations up to and including part of the 70 kV
station. The tube is then seasoned at 70 kV. Progressively higher kV stations are then auto calibrated and
seasoned. Finally the entire kV and mA range is auto calibrated, then the tube is seasoned at the remaining
high kV values.
Manually releasing the exposure button during auto calibration of a particular kV station in the
following procedure prevents the generator from attempting operation beyond that kV/mA value.

NOTE: THE TUBE MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDED SEASONING PROCEDURE, IF AVAILABLE,


MUST ALWAYS BE USED IN PLACE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE.

X-ray tubes that have not been used for more than 8 hours may suffer thermal shock if operated at
high mA and kV without a warm-up procedure. A cold anode (Molybdenum) is very brittle and when
suddenly heated over a small area may experience thermal cracking of the anode surface, eventually
leading to permanent tube damage.

The procedure below is intended for seasoning an X-ray tube prior to attempting tube auto calibration. To
season a tube that does not need to be calibrated, follow steps 2, 4, and 6.

X-ray tube seasoning should be done on LARGE focus in order to minimize tube wear.

1. Start the tube auto calibration sequence, and manually terminate the exposure at 70 kV and 250 mA.

2. Season the tube at 70 kV by taking approximately 10 exposures of 200 mA and 100 ms. These
exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds.

3. Restart the auto calibration sequence and manually terminate the exposure at 100 kV and 250 mA.

4. Season the tube at 100 kV by taking approximately 5 exposures of 200 mA and 100 ms. These
exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds.

5. Restart the auto calibration sequence and manually terminate the exposure at 120 kV and 160 mA.

6. Season the tube at 120 kV by taking approximately 5 exposures of 160 mA and 100 ms. These
exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds.

7. Restart the auto calibration sequence and allow the auto calibration sequence to complete.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-07 Rev. F Page 6-11
6 Regular Maintenance CPI Canada Inc.

6.10.0 END OF PRODUCT LIFE

The generator’s useful life has been estimated at 10 years from point of sale. This will vary depending on use
and environmental conditions. If the generator has completed its useful service life, local environmental
regulations must be complied with in regard to disposal of possible hazardous materials used in the
construction of the generator.
In order to assist with this determination, the noteworthy materials used in the construction of this
generator are itemized below:

ITEM
• Electrical insulating oil in HT tank. This is a mineral oil with trace additives (25 Litre (6.5 U.S. gal)

• Solder (lead/tin).

• Epoxy fiberglass circuit board materials, tracks are solder on copper.

• Wire, tinned copper. Insulated with PVC, tefzel, or silicone.

• Steel and / or aluminum (generator cabinet and console chassis).

• Plastic (console enclosure and console membrane).

• Electrical and electronic components: IC’s, transistors, diodes, resistors, capacitors, etc.

WARNING: DO NOT DISASSEMBLE, INCINERATE, OR SHORT-CIRCUIT THE BATTERY(S) IN THIS


PRODUCT. DO NOT PUT IT IN TRASH THAT IS DISPOSED OF IN LANDFILLS; DISPOSE OF IT
AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL ORDINANCES.
THE FLUORESCENT LAMP IN THE LCD DISPLAY CONTAINS MERCURY. DO NOT PUT IT IN
TRASH THAT IS DISPOSED OF IN LANDFILLS; DISPOSE OF IT AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL
ORDINANCES.
THE LCD IS MADE OF GLASS. IF THE LCD BREAKS DUE TO ROUGH HANDLING OR
DROPPING, AND THE INTERNAL FLUID GETS IN YOUR EYES OR ON YOUR HANDS,
IMMEDIATELY WASH THE AFFECTED AREAS WITH WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES.
SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IF ANY SYMPTOMS ARE PRESENT AFTER WASHING.

Page 6-12 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-07 Rev. F
CPI Canada Inc. Theory of Operation 7

Chapter 7

THEORY OF OPERATION
CONTENTS:

7.1.0 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................................. 2
7.2.0 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION...................................................................................................... 2
7.2.1 System ON (MD-0832)................................................................................................................................. 2
7.2.2 DC bus & power distribution (MD-0831) ...................................................................................................... 3
7.2.3 Room interface (MD-0833)........................................................................................................................... 5
7.2.4 X-ray exposure (MD-0834)........................................................................................................................... 5
7.2.5 kV control and feedback (MD-0835)............................................................................................................. 6
7.2.6 Filament drive and mA control (MD-0836) ................................................................................................... 7
7.2.7 Low speed starter (MD-0837)....................................................................................................................... 8
7.2.8 DAP (MD-0840) ............................................................................................................................................ 9
7.2.9 Serial communications (MD-0839) ............................................................................................................... 9
7.2.10 AEC (MD-0838) ........................................................................................................................................ 10
7.2.11 Touchscreen isolated 115 VAC supply (MD-0868) .................................................................................. 14
7.2.12 Interconnect diagram (MD-0845) ............................................................................................................. 14

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-08 Rev. L Page 7-1
7 Theory of Operation CPI Canada Inc.

7.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This chapter contains the theory of operation for the CMP 200 X-ray generator. The theory of operation is
organized by functional blocks as depicted in the functional drawings in chapter 9.

7.2.0 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION

Refer to the appropriate functional block diagram in chapter 9 in conjunction with the theory of operation
in this chapter. Waveforms and voltages at the pertinent test points are shown on the last page of each
functional drawing.

7.2.1 System ON (MD-0832)

The generator control board on the CMP 200 X-ray generator includes power ON and OFF switches S2
and S1 that may be used to switch the generator on and off locally while working on the equipment.
These switches are connected in parallel with the main generator power ON and OFF switches that are
located on the console.
Pressing either of the power ON switches described above turns on Q2 on the generator control board.
This turns on Q3, holding the collector of Q3 low. This latches Q2 in the “on” state by holding the base of
Q2 low when the ON button is released.
The collector of Q3 is connected to K1 on the generator control board (MD-0831). K1 will energize when
the generator is switched on, supplying +24 V to the console.
With Q3 turned on, the base of Q21 is held low, turning Q21 off. The collector of Q21 is connected to the
ON / OFF control pins on the +5 V, +12 V, and +15 V regulators on the generator control board (MD-
0831). With Q21 turned off, the regulator control pins will be pulled to a logic high state, enabling the +5
V, +/-12 V, and +15 V supplies.
When the +5 V rail is established, the CPU on the generator control board will start to function. The CPU
will perform its start-up diagnostics, and then output a command via U2 and U40 on the generator control
board to energize soft-start contactor K2 on the H.V auxiliary board. The CPU will then wait for up to 10
seconds for the output of opto-coupler U5 on the H.V auxiliary board to ramp high, indicating that the DC
bus capacitors are charged. If U5 indicates proper DC bus capacitor charging, within the allotted time, the
CPU will output a command to U2 and U40 on the generator control board to energize the main power
contactor via the H.V auxiliary board. Soft-start contactor K2 will be de-energized after a maximum of 10
seconds, as the soft-start circuit is not needed once the bus capacitors are charged.
If the indication of normal bus capacitor charge is not received within the allowed time limit, an error
message will be presented and the turn-on sequence will be aborted.
Pressing either of the OFF switches turns on Q1 on the generator control board. This turns off Q2, turning
off Q3. This will de-energize K1 on the generator control board, removing the +24 V supply from the
console, and will also turn on Q21. With Q21 on, the ON / OFF control pins on the +5 V, +12 V, and +15
V regulators on the generator control board will be pulled low, disabling the regulators, thus removing the
+5 V, +/-12 V, and +15 V supplies.

Page 7-2 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-08 Rev. L
CPI Canada Inc. Theory of Operation 7

7.2.2 DC bus & power distribution (MD-0831)

Sheet 1 applies to single-phase generators.


Assuming that the AC mains is connected and switched on, line voltage is applied to the primary of the
auxiliary transformer via F8 and F9. This will establish the +/-35 V supplies via F1 and D1, and the +24 V
supply via F2 and F3, and D3 / D4.
When the generator is switched on as described in 7.2.1, +24 V is supplied via K1 to the console where it
is regulated to +5 V and -20 V on the console board. Also, the +5 V, +/-12 V, and +15 V supplies on the
generator control board are established as per 7.2.1.
After the soft-start command is received from the CPU (refer to 7.2.1), K2 on the H.V. auxiliary board is
energized. This will pre-charge the DC bus capacitors via F4 and F5, K2, D5 and current limiting resistors
R11 / R16. DC bus charging current will also flow through R17, developing sufficient voltage drop to
energize U5. The output of U5 will be low while the DC bus capacitors are charging. As the bus
capacitors approach a fully charged state, the current in R17 will approach zero, U5 will stop conducting,
and the output of U5 will go high. When the CPU detects that the bus is charged via U5, the main power
contactor and the cooling fan will be energized. The line voltage will then be rectified by the chassis
mounted mains rectifier assembly to produce approximately 320 VDC for 230 VAC input. This DC bus
voltage is switched by the inverter board to produce the drive for the primary of the HT transformer as
described in 7.2.5.
LED DS1 on the H.V. auxiliary board confirms the presence of the +24 VDC supply, and an LED (DS1) on
the EMC capacitor board indicates that the DC bus is charged.
The console board contains a 300 VAC (approximately) power supply that drives the cold-cathode
fluorescent lamp in the LCD display assembly. This power supply is driven from the +5 VDC supply.
The BUCKY DRIVE output may be configured for +24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220 VAC. Connecting E11 to E5
and E10 to E8 supplies +24 VDC, wiring E9 to E5 and E7 to E8 supplies 110 VAC, and jumpering E12 to
E5 and E7 to E8 outputs 220 VAC.
K6 on the H.V. auxiliary board will be energized when the +12 V supply on the generator control board is
present, supplying +24 VDC, 120 VAC, or 240 VAC to the Bucky drive circuits (section 7.2.3).
The low speed starter boost voltage is jumper selectable to be 120 or 240 VAC. Connecting E16 to E15
selects 240 V boost, and jumpering E14 to E15 selects 120 V boost.

Sheet 2 applies to three phase 400 / 480 V generators.


Assuming that the AC mains is connected and switched on, line voltage is applied to the primary of the
auxiliary transformer via F8 and F9. This will establish the +/-35 V supplies via F1 and D1, and the +24 V
supply via F2 and F3, and D3 / D4.
When the generator is switched on as described in 7.2.1, +24 V is supplied via K1 to the console where it
is regulated to +5 V and -20 V on the console board. Also, the +5 V, +/-12 V, and +15 V supplies on the
generator control board are established as per 7.2.1.
After the soft-start command is received from the CPU (refer to 7.2.1), K2 on the H.V. auxiliary board is
energized. This will pre-charge the DC bus capacitors via F4 and F5, K2, D5 and current limiting resistors
R11 / R27. DC bus charging current will also flow through R17, developing sufficient voltage drop to
energize U5. The output of U5 will be low while the DC bus capacitors are charging. As the bus
capacitors approach a fully charged state, the current in R17 will approach zero, U5 will stop conducting,
and the output of U5 will go high. When the CPU detects that the bus is charged via U5, the main power
contactor and the cooling fan will be energized. The line voltage will then be rectified by the chassis
mounted mains rectifier assembly to produce approximately 560 VDC for 400 VAC input, or
approximately 670 VDC for 480 VAC input. This DC bus voltage is switched by the inverter board to
produce the drive for the primary of the HT transformer as described in 7.2.5.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-08 Rev. L Page 7-3
7 Theory of Operation CPI Canada Inc.

7.2.2 DC bus & power distribution (Cont)

LED DS1 on the H.V. auxiliary board confirms the presence of the +24 VDC supply, and an LED (DS1)
located on the EMC capacitor board indicates that the DC bus is charged.
The console board contains a 300 VAC (approximately) power supply that drives the cold-cathode
fluorescent lamp in the LCD display assembly. This power supply is driven from the +5 VDC supply.
The BUCKY DRIVE output may be configured for +24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220 VAC. Connecting E11 to E5
and E10 to E8 supplies +24 VDC, wiring E9 to E5 and E7 to E8 supplies 110 VAC, and jumpering E12 to
E5 and E7 to E8 outputs 220 VAC.
K6 on the H.V. auxiliary board will be energized when the +12 V supply on the generator control board is
present, supplying +24 VDC, 120 VAC, or 240 VAC to the Bucky drive circuits (section 7.2.3).
The low speed starter boost voltage is jumper selectable to be 120 or 240 VAC. Connecting E16 to E15
selects 240 V boost, and jumpering E14 to E15 selects 120 V boost.

Sheet 3 applies to three phase 208 / 230 V generators.


Assuming that the AC mains is connected and switched on, line voltage is applied to the primary of the
auxiliary transformer via F8 and F9. This will establish the +/-35 V supplies via F1 and D1, and the +24 V
supply via F2 and F3, and D3 / D4.
When the generator is switched on as described in 7.2.1, +24 V is supplied via K1 to the console where it
is regulated to +5 V and -20 V on the console board. Also, the +5 V, +/-12 V, and +15 V supplies on the
generator control board are established as per 7.2.1.
After the soft-start command is received from the CPU (refer to 7.2.1), K2 on the H.V. auxiliary board is
energized. This will pre-charge the DC bus capacitors via F4 and F5, K2, D5 and current limiting resistors
R11 / R16. DC bus charging current will also flow through R17, developing sufficient voltage drop to
energize U5. The output of U5 will be low while the DC bus capacitors are charging. As the bus
capacitors approach a fully charged state, the current in R17 will approach zero, U5 will stop conducting,
and the output of U5 will go high. When the CPU detects that the bus is charged via U5, the main power
contactor and the cooling fan will be energized. The line voltage will then be rectified by the chassis
mounted mains rectifier assembly to produce approximately 320 VDC FOR 230 VAC input. This DC bus
voltage is switched by the inverter board to produce the drive for the primary of the HT transformer as
described in 7.2.5.
LED DS1 on the H.V. auxiliary board confirms the presence of the +24 VDC supply, and an LED (DS1)
located on the EMC capacitor board indicates that the DC bus is charged.
The console board contains a 300 VAC (approximately) power supply that drives the cold-cathode
fluorescent lamp in the LCD display assembly. This power supply is driven from the +5 VDC supply.
The BUCKY DRIVE output may be configured for +24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220 VAC. Connecting E11 to E5
and E10 to E8 supplies +24 VDC, wiring E9 to E5 and E7 to E8 supplies 110 VAC, and jumpering E12 to
E5 and E7 to E8 outputs 220 VAC.
K6 on the H.V. auxiliary board will be energized when the +12 V supply on the generator control board is
present, supplying +24 VDC, 120 VAC, or 240 VAC to the Bucky drive circuits (section 7.2.3).
The low speed starter boost voltage is jumper selectable to be 120 or 240 VAC. Connecting E16 to E15
selects 240 V boost, and jumpering E14 to E15 selects 120 V boost.

Page 7-4 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-08 Rev. L
CPI Canada Inc. Theory of Operation 7

7.2.3 Room interface (MD-0833)

+24 VDC, 120 VAC, or 240 VAC for the BUCKY DRIVE is available when K6 on the H.V. auxiliary board
is energized as described in 7.2.2. The 24 VAC and 24 VDC supplies are present at all times that the AC
mains is energized. The 24 VAC supply is fused by F11 and brought out at J11-6 and J11-5 of the H.V.
auxiliary board (maximum 150 watts for collimator use), and the 24 VDC supply is fused by F12 and
made available at J11-2 and J11-1 for system locks use (maximum 45 watts).
Bucky relays K1 and K3 on the H.V. auxiliary board are driven by U2 and U40 on the generator control
board. When K1 or K3 is energized, +24 VDC, 120 VAC, or 240 VAC is provided at J2-7 or J4-1 of the
H.V. auxiliary board to start Bucky 1 or Bucky 2.
The Bucky 1 or Bucky 2 ready signal (a contact closure is needed) will energize opto coupler U2 or U6
respectively. The Bucky-ready status from U2 or U6 is conveyed to the CPU via buffer U44, where it is
used to determine that the Buckys are ready to make an X-ray exposure.
During an X-ray exposure, the CPU will pull the base of Q23 on the generator control board high. This will
turn on Q23, energizing K7 on the H.V. auxiliary board. K7 provides a dry contact closure when energized
that may be used to control the room light.
The H.V. auxiliary board also contains 4 interlock inputs. These include interlocks 1 and 2, the door
interlock, and the X-ray tube thermal switch interlock. Each of these interlock inputs requires a contact
closure to indicate a normal condition, with a closed interlock energizing the associated opto coupler U1,
U3, U4, or U9 respectively. The outputs of the opto-couplers are read by the CPU via U44 on the
generator control board, where the information is used to determine the readiness of the associated input.

7.2.4 X-ray exposure (MD-0834)

The PREP and X-RAY switches on the console are connected in parallel with the Prep and X-ray
switches in the hand switch as per drawing MD-0834. Pressing PREP energizes opto coupler U9 on the
console board, and U41 on the generator control board. The output of these opto couplers is read directly
by the console CPU and by the generator CPU, and interpreted as a valid prep command if the outputs of
U9 and U41 are both low. DS5 on the generator control board will light to indicate that the console or
hand switch PREP switch is pressed. Remove JW1 and JW2 on the console CPU board to disable the
PREP and X-RAY buttons. This will prevent the PREP and X-RAY signals from being initiated via the
control console. In this instance an external hand switch is required to create exposures.
Pressing X-ray will energize U10 on the console board, and U42 and U43 on the generator control board.
The output of U10 is read by the console CPU, and the output of U42 is read by the generator CPU. If
both of these commands are present, the software will recognize a valid X-ray request, and take the
emitter of U43 low via U2 and driver U40 on the generator control board. With a valid hardware X-ray
request (X-ray switch pressed) and a valid software X-ray request, the collector of U43 will be held low.
The collector of U43 is OR’ed with several other signals on the generator control board, all of which must
be at the correct logic level in order to be able to make an X-ray exposure. Refer to 7.2.5 for further
details. DS6 on the generator control board will light to indicate that the console or hand switch X-ray
switch is pressed.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-08 Rev. L Page 7-5
7 Theory of Operation CPI Canada Inc.

7.2.5 kV control and feedback (MD-0835)

Refer to MD-0835, sheet 1:


Prior to the X-ray request being received, the CPU supplies base current to Q17 on the generator control
board, turning Q17 on. Q17 then supplies base current to Q16, turning Q16 on, thus holding the junction
of R178 / R179 high (+12 V). This ensures that the error amplifier cannot generate any kV demand.
When the X-ray request is received, Q17 is turned off, turning Q16 off, effectively isolating Q16 from the
circuit. At the same time, the kV reference voltage is produced by D/A converter U46. The kV reference
voltage is buffered by U50A, inverted by U35A, and then summed with the positive going kV feedback
signal from U28B at the input of error amplifier U36A. Error amplifier U36A will regulate the kV by
producing a DC output that is proportional to the difference between the kV reference voltage and the kV
feedback voltage.
The HT primary current is sampled by T2, and rectified by D16 to D19 to produce a current limit signal (a
negative voltage proportional to the primary current). This is applied to the input of U36B, where it will
limit the kV demand if the primary current exceeds safe limits. This current limit signal is also fed to
comparator U22, which generates a fault pulse if excessive primary current is sensed. This fault pulse is
detected by U2, immediately causing the gate drive to be inhibited, preventing inverter damage due to the
over-current condition.
The output of U36B swings increasingly negative for increased kV demand. This kV demand voltage is
buffered and inverted by U37A, and then applied to the VCO (voltage controlled oscillator).
The VCO generates complementary output pulses that vary in frequency. The frequency of these pulses
is inversely proportional to demanded generator output power. The current sense feedback from T1
synchronizes the start of the pulses.
The output pulses from the VCO are applied to AND gates U17A and U17B. The control inputs of U17
(TP16) are held high if all logic conditions to allow an X-ray exposure are satisfied. The pulses are
inverted and level shifted by U18A and U18B, and then applied to the gates of the MOSFET inverter
consisting of Q9, Q10, Q12, and Q13 on the generator control board. These MOSFETS form a full bridge
inverter circuit that outputs high frequency gate pulses to the power MOSFETS on the inverter board(s)
via J5 and / or J13 on the generator control board.
In order for the control inputs of U17A and U17B to be pulled high, allowing the gate pulses to be passed,
the following conditions must be satisfied:
• The base of Q14 must be held low by the CPU. This will only be true if all software logic conditions
are satisfied to allow an X-ray exposure.
• The base of Q11 must be held low by U2. This will only be true if no faults have been detected.
• The X-RAY ENABLE command must be present as described in 7.2.4.
• The feedback cable (J9 generator control board to J3 of the HT tank) must be connected.
The differential kV feedback voltage from the HT tank is brought to J9 on the generator control board.
This is applied to the inputs of U28A and U30B, where the kV feedback scaling is precisely set by R218.
The differential feedback signals are then summed by U28B. The output of U28B supplies a kV feedback
signal to error amplifier U36A as described earlier in this section. The kV feedback signal is also supplied
to the CPU via A/D converter U45, where it is used to monitor the output voltage during an exposure.
Lastly, the kV feedback signal is fed to the kV over voltage comparator U29, which will send a fault pulse
to the CPU via U2 if a kV over-voltage condition is detected.
The generator control board also contains circuits that guard against an inverter “shoot-through” fault. If a
shoot through fault is detected, T3 and / or T4 on the generator control board will supply a current pulse
that is detected by comparator circuits U39 and U57. The relevant comparator will then generate a fault
pulse that is detected by U2, causing the gate drive to be inhibited immediately, thus preventing inverter
damage due to this fault.

Page 7-6 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-08 Rev. L
CPI Canada Inc. Theory of Operation 7

7.2.5 kV control and feedback (Cont)

Refer to MD-0835, sheet 2 and 3:


The inverter board(s) produce the high power drive for the HT transformers (30, 32, and 40 kW
generators use one inverter board, 50 kW units use two inverter boards). The output of the inverter
board(s) drive the primaries of the HT transformers via the resonant capacitor and the resonant / EMC /
sharing inductors.
The HT tank has similar anode and cathode sections. The cathode and anode sections each have their
own high voltage transformer and high voltage multiplier board. The anode section generates the anode
voltage, 0 to 62.5 or 75 kV. The cathode section generates the cathode voltage, 0 to -62.5 or -75 kV. The
anode and cathode sections contain voltage dividers that supply kV anode and cathode feedback
voltages. The kV feedback from the HT tank is brought to J9 on the generator control board as described
earlier in this section.
The HT tank is not field-repairable. Defective HT tanks must be exchanged with equivalent units.

7.2.6 Filament drive and mA control (MD-0836)

Refer to MD-0836, sheet 1:


If a valid Prep command has been received by the CPU, D/A converter U48 on the generator control
board will produce the filament reference voltage (1 volt = 1 amp of filament current). This is buffered by
U52B, and then routed to the filament supply board via J14 of the generator control board.
The filament reference voltage is applied to U1B on the filament supply board. The output of U1B is
summed with the output of current limit clamp U1A. The filament current limit is set at 5.5 or 6.5 amps via
JW1; it is shown set to limit at 5.5 amps on MD-0836.
The filament reference voltage is then summed with the filament feedback voltage at the input of error
amplifier U4B. When the reference is greater than the feedback, the output of U4B rises, causing the
pulse width at the output of U3 to increase.
PWM (pulse width modulator) U3 drives MOSFETS Q6, Q7, Q12, and Q13, which form a full bridge
inverter. The MOSFETS convert the + and - 35 V supplies to high frequency AC to drive the primary of
the filament transformers at the filament switching frequency, approximately 40 kHz, via C22, the primary
of T1, large / small filament select relay K1, J5 on the filament supply board, and J4 on the tank lid board.
The secondaries of the filament transformers provide high voltage isolation, and drive the filaments via
the HV cathode board and the cathode high voltage connector as shown.
The output of filament current sense transformer T1 on the filament supply board is rectified by D12, D13,
D27, and D28, and fed to RMS converter circuit consisting of U7 and associated components. The output
of the RMS converter drives U4A, which is a variable gain amplifier. The filament current feedback is
calibrated such that 1 volt = 1 amp of filament current. The calibrated filament feedback voltage
(representing actual filament current) appears at the input of buffer U2B and at the summing input of error
amplifier U4B as described earlier in this section.
The output of U2B is brought to J2-2 on the filament supply board. This filament current feedback signal
is then fed to A/D converter U45 on the generator control board, where it is monitored by the CPU.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-08 Rev. L Page 7-7
7 Theory of Operation CPI Canada Inc.

7.2.6 Filament drive and mA control (Cont)

Refer to MD-0836, sheet 2:


When an exposure is being made, X-ray tube current flows through series resistors on the HV anode and
cathode boards. The voltage developed across these resistors, which is proportional to the X-ray tube
current, is taken to J9 of the generator control board. Transient protectors on the high voltage boards
clamp the voltage across the series resistors during high voltage arcs.
The “ground” side of the high voltage boards in the HT tank is connected to the mA test jacks E17 / E18
on the tank lid board. Transient protectors on the tank lid board clamp the voltage across the mA
measuring device if the mA test jack is removed during high voltage arcs, and prevent the voltage at E17
and E18 from rising above approximately 15 volts if the ma test jack is removed.
The anode mA feedback that appears at J9-1 and J9-2 of the generator control board is scaled
approximately 0.4 volts = 100 mA of anode current, and is applied to the input of differential amplifier
U33B.
The output of U33B is taken to comparator U32, which detects high anode mA. U32 will send a fault pulse
to U2 if an anode over-current condition is detected, causing the kV output to be inhibited immediately,
thus preventing damage due to the over-current fault.
The output of U33B is also applied to the input of U33A, which provides a scaled mA feedback voltage.
The mA is calibrated by R160 such that 1 volt = 100 mA at the output of U33A. The output of U33A is fed
to the CPU via A/D converter U45, and also to voltage amplifier U38A, which provides a better quality
(higher gain) feedback signal to the CPU at low anode currents. The mA feedback information is used by
the CPU to regulate the X-ray tube mA and to perform mA monitoring functions during exposures.
The cathode mA feedback at J9-4 and J9-3 of the generator control board is used for cathode over-
current detection only. The cathode mA feedback is applied to the input of differential amplifier U30A. The
output of U30A is taken to comparator U31, which detects high cathode mA. U31 will send a fault pulse to
U2 if a cathode over-current condition is detected, thus preventing damage due to the over-current fault.

7.2.7 Low speed starter (MD-0837)

Nominal 240 VAC is supplied to the low speed starter via F6 and F7 on the H.V. auxiliary board. For
single-phase generators, this is derived directly from the AC mains. For three-phase units, 240 VAC for
the low speed starter is supplied by a separate autotransformer that is fed from two of the three AC input
phases. Refer to MD-0831 for further details.
The coil of K4 on the H.V auxiliary board is connected in parallel with the main power contactor, and is
thus energized when the main power contactor is energized after completion of the generator power-on
sequence. This is described in 7.2.1.
When a Prep request is made, K5 is energized for approximately 1.8 seconds by the CPU via U2 and
U40 on the generator control board in order to boost the rotor. The rotor is allowed to coast briefly, and
then boosted again for approximately 500 milliseconds every 5 seconds during Prep in order to maintain
normal anode rotation. During the boost cycles (when K5 is energized), nominal 240 VAC is applied to
the main winding, and to the shift winding of the stator via phase shift capacitor C12.
The main and shift currents will flow through R20 and R19 respectively, energizing opto couplers U7 and
U8 if there is sufficient stator current. Normally, the opto couplers will only conduct during the peaks of the
stator current. This is reflected in the output waveform of the opto couplers at TP8 and TP7 as shown on
page 2 of MD-0837. If there is low (or no) stator current, U8 and / or U7 will not be energized. The output
of the opto couplers at TP8 / TP7 will then be pulled high (+5 V). This condition is detected by the CPU
via U44 on the generator control board, and recognized as a stator fault.

Page 7-8 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-08 Rev. L
CPI Canada Inc. Theory of Operation 7

7.2.8 DAP (MD-0840)

The DAP circuits consist of micro-controller U11, RS-232 driver U13, and associated components on the
generator control board. Micro-controller U11 operates under control of the CPU on the generator control
board, and controls all DAP functions (switches the +15 V supply via Q4, Q6, and Q8 as required to
control and test the DAP device, and counts the DAP pulses via U13).

7.2.9 Serial communications (MD-0839)

When the generator is switched on and the start-up diagnostics are completed, the console CPU will
attempt to communicate with the generator CPU. The console will send data to the generator, and then
wait for a response from the generator. If the console receives a response, communication may continue.
If the console CPU does not receive a response from the generator CPU, a communication error
message will be presented.
When the console is sending data to the generator, DS2 on the console board and DS3 on the generator
control board will flash. DS2 on the generator control board and DS3 on the console board will flash to
indicate that the generator control board is sending data to the console.
U11 is an RS-232 driver, and converts the +5 V TTL levels from the CPU to RS-232 levels for the serial
port, J4. DS5 and DS4 on the console board will flash to indicate that data is being sent to, and received
from the serial port.
DS1 on the console board and on the generator control board will flash at a consistent 1 Hz rate if the
CPU is operational.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-08 Rev. L Page 7-9
7 Theory of Operation CPI Canada Inc.

7.2.10 AEC (MD-0838)

Refer to MD-0838, sheet 1:


This shows the circuits on the generator control board that provide interfacing between the generator
CPU and the AEC board. Eight lines supply the AEC chamber select signals, the start signal, and the field
select signals to the AEC board via U2 and driver U26. The AEC ramp (PT RAMP), from the AEC board,
is voltage-amplified by a factor of 20 by U23B and compared to the AEC reference voltage by U24. The
output of U24 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp is approximately 5%
of the AEC reference voltage. This step change at the output of U24 is detected by U2, and is used by the
CPU to generate an error message if the trajectory of the AEC ramp is such that the AEC exposure will
exceed the AEC backup time.
The AEC reference voltage is generated by D/A converter U47, buffered by U50B, and fed to comparator
U24 and to the AEC board via J7-10. The magnitude of the AEC reference voltage is determined by the
CPU, and will be a value between 0 and 10 volts.
The PT stop signal is generated by the AEC board when the magnitude of the AEC ramp is equal to the
AEC reference voltage, and indicates that the desired AEC exposure should be terminated. The PT stop
signal is squared by Schmidt trigger U56D, and then connected to an interrupt input on the CPU where it
will terminate the AEC exposure immediately when the interrupt is received.

Refer to MD-0838, sheet 2:


This page shows the functional schematic of AEC assembly 733347, used with solid-state AEC
chambers. The signal from the AEC chamber is applied between the common anode and the cathode
inputs of J1/J11, J2/J12, J3/J13, and / or J4/J14. The AEC board will either be fitted with 5 pin in-line
connectors, or circular style connectors, depending on the application. U11A, U11B, U1A, and U1B are
extremely high gain preamplifiers that convert the current output from the AEC diodes (several hundred
pico amps, typically) to a useable voltage.
The output of each preamplifier is fed to the AEC gain adjustment potentiometers, R1 to R4, used for
AEC calibration. The AEC signal is then taken to the input of analog switch U6A to U6D.
The chamber-select signals originate on the generator control board as per sheet 1. Only one chamber
may be active at one time, and the active channel is indicated by DS1 to DS4 on the AEC board. The
chamber-select signals are inverted by U2A to U2D; and then connected to the control inputs of analog
switches U6A to U6D. The analog switch corresponding to the selected AEC input channel will be closed
when that channel is selected, thus connecting the preamplifier for the active channel to gain stage U9B.
The field select signals also originate on the generator control board, and are active-low. An active field
select signal will pull the base of Q1, Q2, or Q3 low. This will turn on that transistor, supplying +12 V at
the field select lines connected to D30, D18, or D19. More than one field may be active at one time.
The field select signals are connected to the control inputs of analog switches at the inputs of U11A,
U11B, U1A, and U1B. This will switch the selected combination of AEC inputs (L, M, R) to the summing
node of each preamplifier. The voltage output of the preamplifiers will be proportional to the number of
fields selected, i.e. the preamplifier output with 3 fields selected will be 3 times that with a single field
selected.
The field select signals are also connected to three analog switches in the feedback loop of U9B. One of
these switches will be closed for each AEC field that is selected. With one field selected, the gain of this
stage will be maximum; with three fields selected the gain of this stage will be divided by three. The
variable gain of U9B, which depends on the number of fields selected, compensates for the variable
voltage output of the preamplifiers as described in the previous paragraph, thus keeping the signal output
from U9B constant relative to the number of fields that are selected. The output of U9B drives difference
amplifier U10B, which subtracts the sample and hold voltage from the input voltage as described in the
next paragraph.

Page 7-10 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-08 Rev. L
CPI Canada Inc. Theory of Operation 7

7.2.10 AEC (Cont)

The start signal also originates on the generator control board. This signal, when active, will cause DS5
on the AEC board to light. The start signal is buffered and inverted by U2F and U2E, and will be logic low
at the output of U2E when the start signal is active. This opens the analog switch that is part of the
sample and hold circuit at the input of U10B, and also opens analog switch U12 during an AEC exposure.
These analog switches are closed at all other times. The sample and hold circuit will sample any electrical
noise at the output of U9B during standby operation, and subtract this noise from the AEC signal during
an AEC exposure. This ensures that the output of U10B is proportional to the AEC chamber output
current only, and is not influenced by noise.
The output of 10B drives integrating amplifier U10A. Analog switch U12 opens when an AEC exposure
starts, allowing C37 to start integrating the AEC voltage. This will produce a ramp whose slope is
proportional to the input voltage at U10A.
The AEC ramp is taken to the generator control board where it is processed as described earlier in this
section, and also fed to comparator U13 on the AEC board where it is compared to the AEC reference
voltage. The output of U13 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp equals
the reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator control board.

Refer to MD-0838, sheet 3:


This is the functional schematic of AEC assembly 734614, used with ionization type AEC chambers. The
AEC chambers are connected to J1/J11, J2/J12, J3/J13, and / or J4/J14. The AEC board will either be
fitted with 12 pin in-line connectors, or 15 pin ‘D’ connectors, depending on the application. The AEC
signal from the AEC chamber(s) is routed to the input of analog switches S1A to S1D on the AEC board.
These analog switches are controlled by the chamber-select signals.
The chamber-select signals originate on the generator control board as per sheet 1. Only one chamber
may be active at one time, and the active channel is indicated by DS1 to DS4 on the AEC board. The
chamber-select signals are inverted by U3B, U3C, U3D, and U3F; and connected to the control inputs of
the analog switches described in the previous paragraph. The analog switch corresponding to the
selected AEC input channel will be closed when that channel is selected, thus connecting the AEC signal
to preamplifier U1A, which provides voltage gain. The input of U1A will be configured such that U1A is a
non-inverting amplifier for use with AEC chambers that have a positive going output, and as an inverting
amplifier for use with chambers with a negative voltage output.
The start signal also originates on the generator control board. This signal, when active, will cause DS5
on the AEC board to be lit. The start signal is buffered and inverted by U3E and U3A, and will be logic low
at the output of U3A when the start signal is active. This opens the analog switch that is part of the
sample and hold circuit at the input of U2A during an AEC exposure. This analog switch is closed at all
other times. The sample and hold circuit will sample any electrical noise at the output of U1A during
standby operation, and subtract this noise from the AEC signal during an AEC exposure. This ensures
that the output of U2A is proportional to the AEC chamber output voltage only, and is not influenced by
noise.
The output of U2A connects to the common inputs of analog switches S2A to S2D. These analog
switches are controlled by the chamber-select signal, and the switch corresponding to the active channel
will be closed. This connects the output of U2A to the AEC gain adjustment potentiometer R1 to R4
corresponding to the active channel. The AEC signal, which will be either a ramp or a DC voltage
depending on AEC chamber type, is now fed to the input of U2B. This will be factory configured as an
integrating amplifier by connecting C4 into the circuit for use with AEC chambers that output a DC output
voltage, or U2B will be configured as a linear amplifier by connecting R32 into the circuit for use with AEC
chambers that provide a ramp voltage. The start signal also connects to analog switch S4. This switch
opens when an AEC exposure starts, allowing U2B to start integrating or amplifying the AEC signal.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-08 Rev. L Page 7-11
7 Theory of Operation CPI Canada Inc.

7.2.10 AEC (Cont)

The output of U2B will be a positive going ramp regardless of the AEC chamber type in use. This ramp
voltage is processed by U4A and U4B, and also fed to the short AEC exposure time compensation circuit
consisting of R11 to R14, S3A to S3D, R53 and C11. Analog switches S3A to S3D are controlled by the
chamber-select signal. The switch corresponding to the active channel will be closed, connecting the
phase-lead network C11 / R53 to the wiper of the AEC short-time adjustment potentiometer. This circuit is
disabled when the wipers of R11 to R14 are at the ground end of the potentiometers, and maximum
short-time compensation is provided when the wipers are set to the end of the potentiometers connected
to U2B.
The AEC ramp from U4B is taken to the generator control board where it is processed as described
earlier in this section, and also fed to comparator U6 on the AEC board where it is compared to the AEC
reference voltage. The output of U6 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp
equals the reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator control board.
The START, and LEFT, MIDDLE, and RIGHT field select signals are brought to the AEC chambers via
J1/J11, J2/J12, J3/J13, and J4/J14. The AEC board will be factory configured to directly output the active
low signal from the generator control board to the AEC chamber if required, or to output +12 V or +24 V if
the chamber requires active high signals. For AEC chambers that require active high outputs, the start,
left, middle, or right field select signal is taken from the collector of Q1 to Q4, respectively. The active low
signals from the generator control board turn on Q1 to Q4, outputting either +12 V or +24V (depending on
factory configuration) at the collector when active.
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J11 to J14. Jumpering pins 2-3 of the field selector
jumpers (JW7 / JW8 for channel 1, JW5 / JW6 for channel 2, JW3 / JW4 for channel 3, JW1 / JW2 for
channel 4) connects the right field select signal to pin 6 and the left field select signal to pin 2. Jumpering
pins 1-2 of the field selector jumpers connects the right field select signal to pin 2 and the left field select
signal to pin 6.
The AEC board also contains a DC to DC converter that produces +45 V, + or - 300 V, and +500 VDC.
The converter circuit consists of U7, T1, output voltage adjustment potentiometer R79, and associated
components. The +45 V output is hard wired to all of the AEC chamber connectors, and + or - 300 V is
permanently connected to J1 to J4. Additionally, the AEC board will be factory configured to supply either
+ or - 300 V or +500 V to J11 to J13, and to a second pin on J1 to J4 (in addition to the + or - 300 V fixed
output).

Refer to MD-0838, sheet 4:


This page shows the input circuits for AEC board assembly 737992. This board is used with solid-state
AEC chambers. The AEC chamber outputs are connected to the anode and cathode inputs of J1/J11,
J2/J12, J3/J13, and / or J4/J14. The AEC board will be fitted either with 7 pin in-line connectors, or with
circular style connectors, depending on the application. U2A, U2B, U8A, U8B, U16A, U16B, U3A, U3B,
U9A, U9B, U17A, and U17B are extremely high gain preamplifiers that convert the current output from the
AEC diodes (several hundred pico amps, typically) to a useable voltage.
The output of each preamplifier is connected to an analog switch used for field selection. Selecting the
desired field closes the corresponding analog switch, connecting the output of that preamplifier to the
summing node at the junction of R69, R9, R22 for channel 1, R40, R47, R55 for channel 2, R70, R11,
R23 for channel 3, and R41, R49, R56 for channel 4.
JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields. Jumpering pins 1-2 of the field selector jumpers (JW1, JW2 for
channel 1, JW3, JW4 for channel 2, JW5, JW6 for channel 3, JW7, JW8 for channel 4) selects the normal
left-right orientation, and jumpering pins 2-3 of the field selector jumpers reverses the left-right field
selection.
Selecting an active AEC channel closes U4D for channel 1, U14D for channel 2, U5D for channel 3, and
U15D for channel 4. The output from the selected AEC channel will then be passed on to the signal
processing circuits as shown on the next sheet of MD-0838.

Page 7-12 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-08 Rev. L
CPI Canada Inc. Theory of Operation 7

7.2.10 AEC (Cont)

Refer to MD-0838, sheet 5:


This shows the signal processing circuits for AEC board assembly 737992. The AEC channel 1 to
channel 4 outputs are connected to the inverting input on U11B, and a sample and hold circuit is
connected to the non-inverting input on U11B. This circuit samples any electrical noise at the input of
U11B during standby operation, and subtracts this noise from the AEC signal during an AEC exposure.
This ensures that the output of U11B is proportional to the AEC chamber output only, and is not
influenced by noise.
The output of U11B is connected to the input of U12A, which is a variable gain amplifier where the gain of
this stage depends on the number of AEC fields that are selected. With one field selected, the gain of this
stage will be maximum; and with three fields selected, the gain of this stage will be divided by three. The
variable gain of U12A compensates for the variable voltage output of the input preamplifiers, thus keeping
the signal output from U12A constant relative to the number of fields that are selected.
The output of U12A is connected to the input of U11A via the gain adjustment pots R1 to R4 and the
analog switches for channels 1 to 4.
U11A is an integrating amplifier where C31 starts to integrate the AEC voltage when the AEC exposure
starts. This is accomplished by opening the analog switches that are in series with R35, R38, R42, and
R59 at the start of the exposure. This produces a ramp whose slope is proportional to the input voltage at
U11A.
The AEC ramp is taken to the generator control board where it is processed as described earlier in this
section, and fed to comparator U10 on the AEC board where it is compared to the AEC reference voltage.
The output of U10 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp equals the
reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator control board.
The chamber-select signals exit on the generator control board as per sheet 1. Only one chamber may be
active at one time, and the active channel is indicated by DS1 to DS4 on the AEC board. The chamber-
select signals are inverted by U6, and then connected to the control inputs on analog switches U4D,
U14D, U5D, and U15D (sheet 5) for AEC channel selection and to the analog switches in series with R1
to R4 to select the required gain pot.
The field select signals from the generator control board are also active low. These signals are inverted
by U6, and then connected to the analog switches in the feedback loop of U12A, and to the analog
switches that select the fields on the previous sheet.
The start signal from the generator control board is inverted by U6 on the AEC board, and then inverted
again by Q2. The output of Q2 is connected to the analog switches in the feedback loop of U11A. The
extra inversion provided by Q2 is required to open those analog switches during an exposure.

Refer to MD-0757, sheet 6:


This is the functional schematic of AEC assembly 737998, used with A.I.D. ionization AEC chambers. The
AEC chambers are connected to J1 to J4. The AEC signal from the AEC chamber(s) is routed to the input
of analog switches U1A to U1D on the AEC board. These analog switches are controlled by the chamber-
select signals.
The chamber-select signals exit on the generator control board as per sheet 1. Only one chamber may be
active at one time, and the active channel is indicated by DS1 to DS4 on the AEC board. The chamber-
select signals are inverted by U6, and connected to the control inputs of the analog switches described in
the previous paragraph. The analog switch corresponding to the selected AEC channel will be closed
when that channel is selected, thus connecting the AEC signal to the input of U7A.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-08 Rev. L Page 7-13
7 Theory of Operation CPI Canada Inc.

7.2.10 AEC (Cont)

The start signal also exits from the generator control board. This is inverted by U6, and then inverted
again by Q4 and Q5. The output of Q5, when active, opens the analog switch that is part of the sample
and hold circuit at the input of U8A during an AEC exposure. This analog switch is closed at all other
times. The sample and hold circuit will sample any electrical noise at the output of U7A during standby
operation, and subtract this noise from the AEC signal during an AEC exposure. This ensures that the
output of U8A is proportional to the AEC chamber output voltage only, and is not influenced by noise.
The output of U8A connects to the common inputs of the analog switches that are in series with gain pots
R11 to R14. These analog switches are controlled by the chamber-select signal, and the switch
corresponding to the active channel will be closed. This connects the output of U8A to the AEC gain
adjustment potentiometer R11 to R14 corresponding to the active channel. The AEC signal, which will be
a ramp, is now fed to the input of U8B. The analog switch in the feedback loop of U8B is opened during
an exposure, allowing the AEC ramp to appear at the outputs of U4A and U4B.
The AEC ramp from U4B is taken to the generator control board where it is processed as described
earlier in this section, and fed to comparator U9 on the AEC board where it is compared to the AEC
reference voltage. The output of U9 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp
equals the reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator control board.
The START signal from Q4, and the LEFT, MIDDLE, and RIGHT field select signals from Q1, Q2, Q3
respectively are brought to the AEC chambers via J1 to J4.
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J1 to J4. Jumpering pins 2-3 of the field selector
jumpers (JW7 / JW8 for channel 1, JW5 / JW6 for channel 2, JW3 / JW4 for channel 3, JW1 / JW2 for
channel 4) connects the right field select signal to pin 6 and the left field select signal to pin 2. Jumpering
pins 1-2 of the field selector jumpers connects the right field select signal to pin 2 and the left field select
signal to pin 6.

7.2.11 Touchscreen isolated 115 VAC supply (MD-0868)

The optional touchscreen isolated 115 VAC supply provides 115 VAC for the touchscreen console. The
primary of the touchscreen transformer is supplied with nominally 230, 400, or 480 VAC from the AC
mains. The CMP touchscreen fusing board provides connections and fusing for the primary and
secondary of the touchscreen transformer, and the connections for the AC mains input and for the
isolated 115 VAC output at J2.

7.2.12 Interconnect diagram (MD-0845)

This drawing shows the cabling between the major subassemblies in the CMP 200 X-ray generator.
Where applicable, this document references the appropriate functional schematics and sections of the
service manual for details on the area of interest.

Page 7-14 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-08 Rev. L
CPI Canada Inc. Spares 8

CHAPTER 8

SPARES
CONTENTS:

Section Title
8.1.0 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST ............................................................................................................................................ 8-2

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-09 Rev. P Page 8-1
8 Spares CPI Canada Inc.

8.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This chapter contains the list of spare parts for the CMP 200 series of X-ray generators.

8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST

The matrix on the next page lists the recommended spare parts for the CMP 200 family of X-ray generators.

Page 8-2 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-09 Rev. P
CPI Canada Inc. Spares 8
8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST (Cont)

TABLE 1
DESCRIPTION 1P 208/230V 3P 208/230V 3P 400/480V SUGGESTED NOTE
QTY
H.V. auxiliary board See note 1 See note 1 See note 1 1 1
Generator control board Consult factory Consult factory Consult factory 1
Filament board 731407-00 731407-00 731407-00 1
Inverter board Consult factory Consult factory Consult factory 1

Console board 736805-00 736805-00 736805-00 1


LCD display assembly 737200-00 737200-00 737200-00 1
AEC board See note 2 See note 2 See note 2 1
Contactor, main power SC2715 SC2715 SC2715 1
Capacitor, DC bus, 9000uF, 400V 736877-00 2
Capacitor, DC bus, 2200uF, 400V SC4108 SC4108 2
Rectifier assembly, mains 6623071100 6623071100 6623071100 1
Transformer, auxiliary 739446-00 739446-00 739446-00 1
Transformer, touchscreen (optional) 739439-00 739439-00 739439-00 1 3
Fan assembly 739401-00 739401-00 739401-00 1
HT tank assembly (complete) Consult factory Consult factory Consult factory 1

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-09 Rev. P Page 8-3
CPI Canada Inc. Spares 8

(This page intentionally left blank)

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-09 Rev. P Page 8-4
CPI Canada Inc. Spares 8

8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST (Cont)

TABLE 2
FUSE LOCATION FUSE TYPE & PART NO. SUGGESTED QTY
Main Line Fuses: (1 phase units): F1, F2 (50A FRN-R-50, 5550031200 2
250V)
Main Line Fuses: (3 phase 32/40 kW units): F1, AG40, 6713837700 3
F2, F3 (40A 480V)
Main Line Fuses: (3 phase 50 kW units): F1, F2, SC60, 6713837500 3
F3 (60A 480V)
Generator control board: F1 (1A 250V Slo-Blo) GDC-1, 5550032900 5
Console board: F1
H.V. auxiliary board: F10
CMP touchscreen fusing board: F1
H.V. auxiliary board: F1, F6, F7 (8A 250V Slo-Blo) S506-8A, 5550037500 5
H.V. auxiliary board: F2, F3 (3.15A 250V Slo-Blo) GDC-3.15, 5550036600 5
H.V. auxiliary board: F11 (6.3A 250V Slo-Blo) GDC-6.3, 5550033400 5
H.V. auxiliary board, 208/230 V units: F4, F5
H.V. auxiliary board: F12 (2A 250V Slo-Blo) GDC-2, 5550032600 5
H.V. auxiliary board, 208/230 V units: F8, F9
H.V. auxiliary board, 400/480 V units: F4, F5 (1A FNQ-1, 6711905800 5
500V Slo-Blo)
H.V. auxiliary board, 400/480 V units: F8, F9 (2A FNQ-2, 5550005300 5
500V Slo-Blo)
Filament board: F1, F2 (4A 250V Slo-Blo) MDL-4, 6713544000 5
CMP touchscreen fusing board, 208/230 V units: GDC-1/2-V, 5550041901 5
F2, F3 (1/2A 250V)
CMP touchscreen fusing board, 400/480 V units: FNQ-1/4, 6711907000 5
F2, F3 (1/4A 500V)

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-09 Rev. P Page 8-5
8 Spares CPI Canada Inc.

8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST (Cont)

NOTE:

1. Refer to table 8-1 for the part number for the H.V. auxiliary board. Four different part numbers are
used, depending on the application:
TABLE 8-1
STATOR TYPE 208 / 230 V GENERATORS 400 / 480 V GENERATORS
“R” type stator 739445-00 739442-00
GE 23/23 Ω stator 739445-01 739442-01

Before installing a replacement H.V. auxiliary board, jumpers must be properly installed on this board
in order to select the Bucky voltage (24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220 VAC). After determining the Bucky
drive voltage requirement, connect the appropriate pair of jumpers in accordance with table 8-2 *.
The jumpers that select the Bucky voltage must be set per the appropriate column in table 8-2.
The column for units with isolated 110 / 220 VAC applies to units using auxiliary transformer
739446, which has 110 and 220 VAC secondary windings (shipments after approximately
August 2005). The column for units without isolated 110 / 220 VAC applies to units using
auxiliary transformers 737116 or 737804, which do not have isolated 110 / 220 VAC windings
(shipments prior to approximately August 2005).
TABLE 8-2
BUCKY H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD JUMPERS H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD JUMPERS
OUTPUT (units with isolated 110 / 220 VAC, (units without isolated 110 / 220 VAC,
using auxiliary transformer 739446) using auxiliary transformer 737116 or
737804)
24 VDC E11-E5, E10-E8 E11-E5, E10-E8
110 VAC E9-E5, E7-E8 E4-E5, E6-E8
220 VAC E12-E5, E7-E8 E3-E5, E6-E8

After determining the required rotor boost voltage, connect a wire jumper between the desired tabs on
the boards *.
TABLE 8-3
ROTOR BOOST VOLTAGE H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD JUMPERS
120 VAC E14-E15
240 VAC E16-E15

* A complete set of jumpers is shipped with each new generator. Three of the jumpers are installed on
the H.V. auxiliary board, and the remaining jumpers are in a bag attached to the lip on the inside of
the cable access slot above the HT tank.
If the Bucky or low-speed starter boost voltage needs to be changed on an existing H.V. auxiliary
board, use the existing jumper(s) if they are of the correct length and have the proper connector to fit
the tab(s) on the board. Otherwise, select the shortest wires from the spare jumper set that will
connect between the desired tabs on the board and that have the proper connectors on the jumpers.
For spares boards, the jumpers will need to be removed from the “old” board and reused.

Page 8-6 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-09 Rev. P
CPI Canada Inc. Spares 8

8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST (Cont)

Additionally, JW1 must be set per table 8-3 before installing a replacement H.V. auxiliary board.
TABLE 8-4
UNIT TYPE JW1 CONFIGURATION: H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD
1 phase OPEN (jumper pins 2-3)
3 phase CLOSED (jumper pins 1-2)

2. The AEC board in your generator was selected to be compatible with specific AEC devices. To
maintain full compatibility, the original part number must be ordered as a replacement. Refer to
chapter 9, section 9.2.0, for the part number of the original AEC board that was shipped in the
generator for which this manual was prepared.

3. The touchscreen transformer supplies an isolated 115 VAC for the optional touchscreen console. This
transformer is only fitted on generators intended for use with a touchscreen console.

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-09 Rev. P Page 8-7
8 Spares CPI Canada Inc.

(This page intentionally left blank)

Page 8-8 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-09 Rev. P
CPI Canada Inc. Schematics 9

CHAPTER 9

SCHEMATICS
CONTENTS:

9.1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 9-2


9.2.0 FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC INDEX.............................................................................................................. 9-2
9.3.0 FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS ........................................................................................................................... 9-2

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-10 Rev. A Page 9-1
9 Schematics CPI Canada Inc.

9.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This chapter contains the functional schematics for the CMP 200 X-ray generator. Each functional
schematic represents a major function in the generator. The functional schematics in this chapter
represent all of the major functional blocks in CMP 200 X-ray generators.

9.2.0 FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC INDEX

The functional schematic index follows this page. The part number for the AEC board originally shipped in
your generator is listed at the bottom of this form.

9.3.0 FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS

The functional schematics immediately follow the functional schematic index.

Page 9-2 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-10 Rev. A
CPI Canada Inc. Schematics 9

REPLACE PAGE 9-3 WITH


“FUNCTIONAL DRAWING INDEX”
FORM MF-0863

THE ASSEMBLY PART NUMBER FOR THE AEC BOARD IS


TO BE TAKEN FROM THE AS-BUILT RECORD:

USE

“PWBA, DEDICATED AEC”


OR
“UNIVERSAL AEC, FINAL ASSY”

CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-10 Rev. A Page 9-3
9 Schematics CPI Canada Inc.

(This page intentionally left blank)

Page 9-4 CMP 200 X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ch # 740987-10 Rev. A

You might also like